2007 Pontiac Grand Prix Owner Manual M - General Motors · 2020-04-09 · 2007 Pontiac Grand Prix Owner Manual M 1. Windshield Replacement ... Detroit, MI 48207 Litho in U.S.A

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Rear Seats ............................................. 16Safety Belts ............................................ 17Child Restraints ...................................... 39Airbag System ........................................ 64Restraint System Check ......................... 80

Features and Controls ................................ 83Keys ....................................................... 84Doors and Locks .................................... 92Windows ................................................ 98Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 100Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 105Mirrors .................................................. 121OnStar® System ................................... 122Storage Areas ...................................... 126Sunroof ................................................ 128

Instrument Panel ....................................... 129Instrument Panel Overview ................... 132Climate Controls ................................... 157Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 168Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 186Audio System(s) ................................... 233

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 283Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 284Towing ................................................. 322

Service and Appearance Care .................. 333Service ................................................. 336Fuel ...................................................... 338Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 344Headlamp Aiming ................................. 388Bulb Replacement ................................ 391

2007 Pontiac Grand Prix Owner Manual M

1

Windshield Replacement ....................... 399Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ... 399Tires ..................................................... 400Appearance Care .................................. 448Vehicle Identification ............................. 458Electrical System .................................. 459Capacities and Specifications ................ 466

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 469Maintenance Schedule .......................... 470

Customer Assistance Information ............. 491Customer Assistance and Information ... 492Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 510

Index .......................................................... 513

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem, and the namesGRAND PRIX, GTP, and GXP are registeredtrademarks of General Motors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without notice.For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute thename “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Pontiac Division whenever it appears in thismanual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15863016 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions.If you do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,”“Do Not do this” or“Do Not let this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle.They use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Passenger Seat ................................ 8Power Seat ................................................... 8Power Lumbar .............................................. 9Heated Seats .............................................. 10Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 10Head Restraints .......................................... 13Passenger Folding Seatback ....................... 14

Rear Seats .................................................... 16Split Folding Rear Seat ............................... 16

Safety Belts .................................................. 17Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 17Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 21How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 22Driver Position ............................................. 22Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 30Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 31Right Front Passenger Position ................... 31Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 32Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ................ 35Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 38Safety Belt Extender ................................... 38

Child Restraints ............................................ 39Older Children ............................................. 39

Infants and Young Children ......................... 42Child Restraint Systems .............................. 45Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 49Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

(LATCH) .................................................. 51Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat

Position ................................................... 58Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position .................................. 60Airbag System .............................................. 64

Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 67When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 70What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 71How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 72What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................... 72Passenger Sensing System ......................... 74Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 78Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 79Restraint System Check ............................... 80

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 80Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ................................................... 81

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Front Seats

Manual Passenger Seat

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat with yourbody to be sure the seat is locked in place.

Power Seat

The driver’s seat power control is located on theoutboard side of the seat.

Driver’s Seat Power Seat Control, Power Lumbar,and Manual Recline shown

8

To adjust the seat, do any of the following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the entire seat by moving theentire control up or down.

Power Lumbar

Your driver’s seat may have power lumbar. Thecontrol is located on the outboard side of the seatcushion.Press the control forward to increase lumbarsupport. Press the control rearward to decreaselumbar support.Keep in mind that as your seating position changes,as it may during long trips, so should the position ofyour lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed.

Driver’s Seat with Power Seat, Power Lumbar, andManual Recline shown

9

Heated Seats

If the vehicle has thisfeature, the buttons arelocated on the climatecontrol panel. SeeClimate Control Systemon page 157 formore information.

Press the button once to activate the high heatsetting. Both indicator lights next to the button willcome on.

Press the button again to select the lowertemperature setting. Only the bottom indicator lightwill come on.

Press the button a third time to turn the heat off.

This feature only works when the ignition is on.

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

10

The seats have manual reclining seatbacks.The lever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seats.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

Driver’s Seat with Power Seat, Power Lumbar,and Manual Recline shown

11

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if the vehicle ismoving.

12

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraintup to raise it.

To lower the head restraint, press the button,located on the top of the seatback, and push thehead restraint down.

13

Passenger Folding Seatback

{CAUTION:

If you fold the seatback forward to carrylonger objects, such as skis, be sure anysuch cargo is not near an airbag. In acrash, an inflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. This could causesevere injury or even death. Secure objectsaway from the area in which an airbagwould inflate. For more information, seeWhere Are the Airbags? on page 67 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 317.

{CAUTION:

Things you put on this seatback canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash. Remove or secureall items before driving.

If the vehicle has this feature, the front passengerseat can be folded flat for more cargo space.

14

To fold the front passenger seatback flat, pull upon the lever located on back of the seat. Push theseatback forward until it locks in place.

To return the seatback to the upright position, pullup on the lever on the back of the seat. Pushthe seatback up until it locks in place.

{CAUTION:


Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

15

Rear Seats

Split Folding Rear SeatBoth sides of the rear seatback can be folded down.This gives direct access to the trunk. Make sure thefront seats are not reclined. If they are, the rearseatback(s) may not fold down all the way.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

To lower the rearseatback, pull the tablocated on the outboardside of the seatbackand fold the seatbackforward.

{CAUTION:


To raise the rear seatback, lift the seatback upuntil it latches. Push and pull on the seatback to besure it is locked in position.

The seatbacks should be kept in the upright,locked position when they are not being used toextend the cargo area.

16

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you and yourpassengers to buckle your safety belts. See SafetyBelt Reminder Light on page 171 and PassengerSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 172.

17

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If youdo have a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

18

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.The rider does not stop.

19

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

20

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

21

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such asbad drivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 39 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 42. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

22

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 38.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 30.

23

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces. The safety belt locksif there is a sudden stop or crash.

24

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

25


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

26


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

27


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

28


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have the fullwidth of the belt to spread impact forces. Ifa belt is twisted, make it straight so it canwork properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

29

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down, pull therelease button (A) outand move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition. You can movethe height adjuster upjust by pushing up on theshoulder belt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without pulling therelease button to make sure it has lockedinto position.

30

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position on page 22.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

31

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

32

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle untilit clicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 38.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder part.

33

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the body arebest able to take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

34

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

Rear Safety Belt Comfort GuidesRear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outboard passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide to the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between theedge of the seatback and the interior bodyto remove the guide from its storage clip.

35

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt and insertthe two edges of the belt into the slots ofthe guide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

36

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly wornmay not provide the protection needed ina crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take beltrestraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 32. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guide, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guide. Pull the guide upward toexpose its storage clip, and then slide theguide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inwardand slide them in between the seatback andthe interior body, leaving only the loop ofthe elastic cord exposed.

37

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crash if the threshold conditions forpretensioner activation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate ina crash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 81.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, sothe extender will be long enough for you. Tohelp avoid personal injury, do not let someone elseuse it, and use it only for the seat it is made tofit. The extender has been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,just attach it to the regular safety belt. Formore information see the instruction sheet thatcomes with the extender.

38

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

39

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt can not properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides on page 35. If the child issitting in the center rear seat passengerposition, move the child toward the safety beltbuckle. In either case, be sure that theshoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder, sothat in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

40

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

41

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

42

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection for

CAUTION: (Continued)


adults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

43

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructionsthat come with the restraint state the weightand height limitations for a particular childrestraint. In addition, there are many kinds ofrestraints available for children withspecial needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

44

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

45

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

46

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system isa portable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured in thevehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,the child has to be secured within the childrestraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to be used ina vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.Then follow the instructions for the restraint.You may find these instructions on the restraintitself or in a booklet, or both.

47

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle. Make sure the childrestraint is properly installed in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions thatcame with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 51 for more information. A childcan be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

48

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child is not properly securedin the child restraint. Make sure the childis properly secured, following theinstructions that came with that restraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older childriding in a booster seat.

49

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one can



guarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

50

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or use thevehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a top tether,you must also use either the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure the child restraint.A child restraint must never be installed using onlythe top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments. The followingexplains how to attach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

51

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

52

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position withlower anchors hastwo labels, nearthe crease between theseatback and theseat cushion.

Rear Seat

53

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located on thetrim cover.

The top tether anchors are located on the rearseatback filler panel. Open the trim cover toaccess the anchors. Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of the vehicle asthe seating position where the child restraint willbe placed. Do not secure a child restraint in the right front

passenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 49 for additional information.

54

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold onlyone child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single anchorcould cause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

55

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow the instructionsof the child restraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

56

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. Pull open the top tether anchor trim

cover to expose the anchor.2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest and youare using a singletether, route the tetherover the seatback.

If the position you areusing does not have aheadrest and youare using a dual tether,route the tether overthe seatback.

If the position you areusing has a fixedheadrest and you areusing a single tether,route the tether over thehead restraint.

57

If the position you areusing has a fixedheadrest and you areusing a dual tether,route the tether aroundthe head restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 51.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position.

Be sure to follow the instructions that came withthe child restraint. Secure the child in the childrestraint when and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

58

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

59

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 51.


To remove the child restraint, if the top tether isattached to the top tether anchor, disconnect it.Unbuckle the vehicle’s safety belt and let it go backall the way. The safety belt will move freely againand be ready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag. Arear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facingchild restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 49.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system is designedto turn off the right front passenger’s frontal airbagwhen an infant in a rear-facing infant seat or a smallchild in a forward-facing child restraint or boosterseat is detected. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 74 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 173 for more information on this includingimportant safety information.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:



60


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing child restraint,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, movethe seat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualPassenger Seat on page 8.

If your child restraint has the LATCH system,see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 51.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires that thetop tether be anchored or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tethermust be anchored. See Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) on page 51 if the childrestraint has a top tether.

61

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’sfrontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 74. We recommend that rear-facingchild restraints be secured in a rear seat, evenif the airbag is off. If your child restraint isforward-facing, move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing the child restraint in thisseat. See Manual Passenger Seat on page 8.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and stay litwhen you turn the ignition to RUN or START.See Passenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 173.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

62

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt and feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt. Youshould not be able to pull more of the belt fromthe retractor once the lock has been set.


63

8. If the airbag is off, the off indicator on theinstrument panel will be lit and stay litwhen the key is turned to RUN or START.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion.If this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child inthe child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver anda frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have roof-mounted sideimpact airbags. Roof-mounted side impact airbagsare available for the driver and the passengerseated directly behind the driver and for the rightfront passenger and the passenger seateddirectly behind that passenger.

If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG will appear onthe airbag covering on the headliner near thedriver’s and right front passenger’s window.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

64

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.

{CAUTION:

Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate inrollover, rear crashes, or in many sidecrashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Roof-mounted side impact airbags aredesigned to inflate in moderate to severecrashes where something hits the side ofyour vehicle. They are not designed toinflate in frontal, in rollover, or in rearcrashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

65

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 39 or Infants and Young Childrenon page 42.

66

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 172 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

67

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the driverand the person seated directly behind the driveris in the ceiling above the side windows.

68

The roof-mounted side impact airbag for the rightfront passenger and the person seated directlybehind that passenger is in the ceiling above theside windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the bag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. And, if your vehiclehas roof-mounted side impact airbags,never secure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie downthrough any door or window opening.If you do, the path of an inflating sideimpact airbag will be blocked. The path ofan inflating airbag must be kept clear.

69

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint according tocrash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontalsensors which helps the sensing system distinguishbetween a moderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderate frontalimpacts, these airbags inflate at a levelless than full deployment. For more severefrontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wallthat does not move or deform, the threshold levelfor the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for afull deployment is about 18 to 24 mph(29 to 38.5 km/h). The threshold level can vary,however, with specific vehicle design, so that it canbe somewhat above or below this range.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight into theobject.

70

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have side impactairbags. See Airbag System on page 64 for moreinformation. Side impact airbags are intendedto inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. Aside impact airbag will inflate if the crash severityis above the system’s designed threshold level.The threshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Side impact airbags are not intendedto inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. A side impact airbagis intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle thatis struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For side impact airbags, inflation isdetermined by the location and severity of theimpact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag, and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules inside thesteering wheel and in the instrument panel in frontof the right front passenger. For vehicles withroof-mounted side impact airbags, there are alsoairbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side windows.

71

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderateto severe side collisions, even belted occupantscan contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbagssupplement the protection provided by safetybelts. Airbags distribute the force of the impactmore evenly over the occupant’s upper body,stopping the occupant more gradually. But thefrontal airbags would not help you in many typesof collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts,and many side impacts, primarily because anoccupant’s motion is not toward the airbag. Sideimpact airbags would not help you in many types ofcollisions, including many frontal or near frontalcollisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’sfrontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe sidecollisions for vehicles with side impact airbags.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After a frontal airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, soquickly that some people may not even realizethe airbag inflated. Roof-mounted side impactairbags may still be at least partially inflatedminutes after the vehicle comes to rest. Somecomponents of the airbag module — the steeringwheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the instrumentpanel for the right front passenger’s airbag, or thegarnish trim and ceiling of your vehicle nearthe side windows for vehicles with roof–mountedside impact airbags — may be hot for a short time.The parts of the airbag that come into contactwith you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.There may be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle,nor does it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

72

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, andturn on the hazard warning flashers when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors again, turnthe interior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controls for those features.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage may also occurfrom the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afteran airbag inflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 504.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can mean thatyour airbag system will not work properly. Seeyour dealer for service.

73

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system.The passenger airbag status indicator on theinstrument panel will be visible when you turnyour ignition key to RUN or START.

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check. Ifyou use remote start to start your vehicle from adistance, if your vehicle has this feature, youmay not see the system check. When the systemcheck is complete, either the word ON or theword OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol foroff, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 173.

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.


United States Canada

74

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommend thatrear-facing child restraints be secured inthe rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat, alwaysmove the front passenger seat as far backas it will go. It is better to secure the childrestraint in a rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a forward-facing child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the offindicator on the instrument panel will light andstay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.

75

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the childrestraint following the child restraint manufacturer’sdirections and refer to Securing a Child Restraint inthe Right Front Seat Position on page 60.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing thechild restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust theseat cushion if possible. Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag, dependingupon the person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor about two minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s airbag.

76

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that something maybe wrong with the airbag system. If thisever happens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger’s seatmay not have the protection of the frontalairbag. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 172 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

A thick layer of additional material such as ablanket, or aftermarket equipment such as seatcovers, seat heaters, and seat massagers,can affect how well the passenger sensingsystem operates. Remove any additionalmaterial from the seat cushion before reinstallingor securing the child restraint and beforea small occupant, including a small adult,sits in the passenger position.

77

You may want to consider not using seat covers orother aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has thepassenger sensing system. See Adding Equipmentto Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 79 formore information about modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

The passenger sensing system may suppress theairbag deployment when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the off indicator in thepassenger airbag status indicator and theairbag readiness light on the instrument panel willbe lit. The system should resume normaloperation after the seat is allowed to dry. If thesystem operates incorrectly after the seathas dried, have your dealer check the system.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 511.

78

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 492.

79

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceilingand pillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbagmodules, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedureon page 492.

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 452for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

80

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, orthe side impact airbag covering (if equipped) onthe ceiling near the side windows, the airbagmay not work properly. You may have to replacethe airbag module in the steering wheel, boththe airbag module and the instrument panel forthe right front passenger’s airbag, or sideimpact airbag module and ceiling covering forroof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped.)Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.

81

If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate, you will also need toreplace the driver’s and right front passenger’ssafety belt buckle assembly. Be sure to doso. Then the new buckle assembly will be there tohelp protect you in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt buckleassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt buckle assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 172.

82

Keys .............................................................. 84Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 86Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ................................................. 87Doors and Locks .......................................... 92

Door Locks ................................................. 92Power Door Locks ....................................... 94Delayed Locking .......................................... 94Programmable Automatic Door Locks .......... 95Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 95Lockout Protection ....................................... 96Trunk .......................................................... 96

Windows ....................................................... 98Power Windows .......................................... 99Sun Visors ................................................ 100

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 100Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 100PASS-Key® III ........................................... 102PASS-Key® III Operation ........................... 103

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 105New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 105Ignition Positions ....................................... 105Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 106Starting the Engine .................................... 107

Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 108Active Fuel Management™ ........................ 109Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 110Parking Brake ........................................... 115Shifting Into Park (P) ................................. 116Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................. 117Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 118Engine Exhaust ......................................... 119Running the Engine While Parked ............. 120

Mirrors ......................................................... 121Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 121Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 121Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 122

OnStar® System .......................................... 122Storage Areas ............................................. 126

Glove Box ................................................. 126Cupholder(s) .............................................. 126Sunglasses Storage Compartment ............. 127Front Seat Storage Net ............................. 127Center Console Storage Area .................... 127Assist Handles .......................................... 127Convenience Net ....................................... 127

Sunroof ....................................................... 128

Section 2 Features and Controls

83

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons. They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or even makethe vehicle move. The children or otherscould be badly injured or even killed.Do not leave the keys in a vehicle withchildren.

84

The key can be used forthe ignition, as well asthe driver’s doorlock and storagecompartments.

The key comes with a bar coded tag attached tothe key ring. Keep this bar coded tag and give it toyour dealer if a new key needs to be made.

The vehicle has the PASS-Key® III vehicle theftsystem. The key has a transponder in the key headthat matches a decoder in the vehicle’s instrumentpanel. The key will have PK3 stamped on it. If areplacement key or an additional key is needed, itmust be purchased from your dealer.

Any new PASS-Key® III key must be programmedbefore it will start the vehicle. See PASS-Key® IIIon page 102 for more information on programminga new key.

In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 498for more information.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

85

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemYour Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) systemoperates on a radio frequency subject to FederalCommunications Commission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in operatingrange. This is normal for any RKE system.If the transmitter does not work or if you have tostand closer to your vehicle for the transmitterto work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too far fromyour vehicle. You may need to stand closerduring rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 87.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

86

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked,and the trunk can be opened from about3 feet (1 m) up to 60 feet (18 m) away withthe remote keyless entry transmitter.

If your vehicle has the remote vehicle startfeature, you can also start the vehicle’s enginewith the remote keyless entry transmitter.

The following functions may be available with yourvehicle’s remote keyless entry system:

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, the engine may be started fromoutside the vehicle using the remote keyless entrytransmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start” later inthis section for more detailed information.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. If enabled through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), the parking lamps may flashonce and the horn may chirp once to indicatelocking has occurred. See “REMOTE LOCKSFEEDBACK” under DIC Controls and Displays(Base Level DIC) on page 186 or DIC Controls andDisplays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) onpage 190 for programming information. Pressingthe lock button will arm the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Content Theft-Deterrent onpage 100 for more information.

Remote Keyless Entrywith Remote Start

Remote Keyless Entrywithout Remote Start

87

" (Unlock): Press the unlock button one time tounlock the driver’s door. Press the unlockbutton again within five seconds to unlock theother doors. The interior lamps will come on andstay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turnedon. If enabled through the DIC, the parkinglamps may flash once and the horn may chirponce to indicate unlocking has occurred. See“REMOTE LOCKS FEEDBACK” under DICControls and Displays (Base Level DIC) onpage 186 or DIC Controls and Displays (UplevelDIC with Trip Computer) on page 190. Pressingthe unlock button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter will disarm the content theft-deterrentsystem. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 100for more details.

V (Trunk Release): Press and hold thisbutton for about one second to release the trunklid. The transaxle must be in PARK (P) forthis feature to operate.

L (Panic Alarm): Press this button to activatethe alarm. The ignition must be in OFF for theremote alarm to work. When the remote alarmbutton is pressed the headlamps will flash and thehorn will sound repeatedly for two minutes. Thealarm will turn off when the ignition is movedto RUN or the remote alarm button is pressedagain.

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking yourvehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through yourGM dealer. Remember to bring any additionaltransmitters with you when you go to your dealer.When the dealer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remainingtransmitters must also be matched. Once yourdealer has coded the new transmitter, thelost transmitter cannot unlock your vehicle. Thevehicle can have a maximum of four transmittersmatched to it.

88

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in the remote keylessentry transmitter should last about four years.

If the battery is weak the transmitter will not workwithin its normal range. It is probably time tochange the battery if you have to be very close tothe vehicle before the transmitter works.

The KEY FOB BATTERY LOW message, in thevehicle’s DIC, will display, if the remote keylessentry transmitter battery is low.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the remote keyless entrytransmitter, do the following:

1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into thenotch, located below the panic alarm button,and separate the bottom half from the tophalf of the transmitter.

2. Remove the old battery and replace it with thenew one. Make sure the positive side (+) ofthe battery faces up. Use one three-volt,CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.

89

3. Put the two halves back together. Make surethe cover is on tight so water will not getinside the transmitter.

4. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote start feature.This feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle. It may also start thevehicle’s heating or air conditioning systems andrear window defogger. When the remote startsystem is active, the climate control system willheat or cool the inside of the vehicle based on theoutside temperature. The rear window defoggerwill be turned on by the climate control systemwhen it is heating the inside of the vehicle. Normaloperation of the system will return after the keyis turned to RUN.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws mayrequire a person using remote start to havethe vehicle in view when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

The remote start feature provides two separatestarts per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes ofengine running time.

The remote start system needs to be reset afteryour vehicle’s engine is started two times using thetransmitter’s remote start button. The remotestart system is reset by inserting the vehicle’s keyinto the ignition switch and turning to RUN.See Ignition Positions on page 105 for informationregarding the ignition positions on your vehicle.

Your remote keyless entry transmitter withthe remote start button provides an increasedrange of operation. You can start your vehicle fromabout 492 feet (150 m) away. However, therange may be less while the vehicle is running,and as a result you may need to be closer to yourvehicle to turn it off than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affectthe performance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 86 foradditional information.

90

/ (Remote Start): If your vehicle has the remotevehicle start feature, the keyless entry transmitterwill have a button with this symbol on it.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button for4 seconds or until the vehicle’s turn signallamps flash. The vehicle’s doors will belocked.

3. When the vehicle starts, the parking lampswill turn on and remain on while the engineis running, and the DIC will display REMOTESTART ACTIVE PRESS HAZARD SWITCHTO CANCEL.The engine will shut off automatically after10 minutes, unless a time extension has beendone or the vehicle’s key is inserted intothe ignition switch and turned to RUN.If you enter the vehicle after a remote start,and the engine is still running, insert thekey into the ignition switch and turn to RUNto drive the vehicle.

4. To manually shut off a remote start, do any ofthe following. The parking lamps will turn off.

• Aim the remote keyless entry transmitterat the vehicle, and press the remotestart button.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch to RUN and thento OFF.

Your vehicle’s engine can be started two timesusing the transmitter’s remote start feature. If onlyone remote start procedure has been done,since last driving the vehicle, or resetting theremote start system, the engine may be startedagain remotely by following the remote startprocedure a second time.

If the remote start procedure is used again beforethe first 10 minute time frame has ended, thefirst 10 minutes will immediately expire andthe second 10 minute time frame will start.The remote vehicle start feature will not operate ifany of the following occur:• The remote start system is disabled through

the DIC.• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.• A door on the vehicle is open.

91

• The vehicle’s hood is open.• The hazard warning flashers are on.• There is an emission control system

malfunction.• The engine coolant temperature is too high.• The oil pressure is low.• Two remote vehicle starts have already been

provided for that ignition cycle.If a remote start is attempted and is unsuccessful,the Driver Information Center (DIC) will displayREMOTE START DISABLED.Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start featureare shipped from the factory with the remote startsystem enabled. The system may be enabled/disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTE START”under DIC Controls and Displays (Base Level DIC)on page 186 or DIC Controls and Displays (UplevelDIC with Trip Computer) on page 190 for additionalinformation.

Remote Start ReadyIf your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it may have the remote startready feature. This feature gives you the ability to

lock or unlock your vehicle from about 492 feet(150 m) away and allows your dealer to addthe manufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature.See your dealer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature toyour vehicle.

Doors and LocksDoor Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.


92


• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out.A child can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock thevehicle.

From the outside, use the key or remote keylessentry transmitter.

From the inside, use the manual or powerdoor locks.

To manually lock orunlock the doors frominside the vehicle, pushdown or pull up on thedoor lock pin locatedon the top of eachdoor panel.

93

Power Door Locks

To lock or unlock alldoors from inside thevehicle, use thepower door lock switchlocated on eitherfront door.

Move the switch on the driver’s door to the right tolock or to the left to unlock the doors. Move theswitch on the passenger’s door to the left to lock orto the right to unlock the doors.

If the vehicle has the content theft-deterrentsystem, the vehicle may be programmed to armthe system with the power door lock switch.See “Lock Switch Arm” under DIC VehicleCustomization on page 226 for more informationon programming the system.

Delayed LockingThis feature delays the locking of the vehicle’sdoors for five seconds after the last door is closed.Two chimes will sound when the power doorlock switch or the LOCK button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter is pressed when a dooris open. The chimes indicate that the delayedlocking feature is on.

The doors can be locked immediately by pressingthe power door lock switch or the LOCK buttonon the transmitter a second time.

The delayed locking feature will not activate whenthe ignition is in RUN or ACC.

You can program this feature on or off through theDriver Information Center (DIC) See “PersonalProgramming Mode Screens” under DIC VehicleCustomization on page 226.

Driver’s Side

94

Programmable AutomaticDoor LocksThe vehicle’s doors are programmed from thefactory to lock when the shift lever is moved into aforward gear, and to unlock when the shift leveris moved into PARK (P).

If someone needs to get in or out of the vehicle afterthe doors have been locked, place the shift leverinto PARK (P). You may also unlock all doors usingthe power door lock switch or unlock one door usingthe inside manual door lock.

To program the door unlocking feature, see“Personal Programming Mode Screens” underDIC Vehicle Customization on page 226. Thelocking feature cannot be disabled or programmed.

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle has rear door security locks. Theseprevent passengers from opening the reardoors from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door. Youmust open the reardoors to access them.

To set the locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot andturn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

95

When you want to open a rear door when thesecurity lock is on, do the following:

1. Unlock the door using the remote keylessentry transmitter, if equipped, the powerdoor lock switch, or by lifting the rear doormanual lock.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slotand turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Lockout ProtectionThe lockout protection feature makes it moredifficult to lock the key in the vehicle. If the driver’sdoor is open while the key is in the ignition, thedoor cannot be locked with the power doorlock switch.

This feature cannot guarantee that you will never belocked out of the vehicle. If the key is not left in theignition, or, if the manual door lock pin is used, thekey could still be locked inside the vehicle. Alwaysremember to take the key with you.

Trunk

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with the trunklid open because carbon monoxide (CO)gas can come into your vehicle.You cannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open or ifelectrical wiring or other cable connectionsmust pass through the seal between thebody and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling

system to its highest speed and selectthe control setting that will forceoutside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 119.

96

To unlock and open the trunk from the outside,press the trunk button on the remote keyless entrytransmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 87.

To open the trunk from the inside, use the powerdoor lock switch located on the driver’s or frontpassenger’s door. See “Remote Trunk Release”following.

The vehicle must be in PARK (P) in order for thetrunk to open.

Remote Trunk ReleaseThis feature is used to unlock the trunk from insidethe vehicle using the power door lock switch.

Press and hold thedriver’s side power doorlock switch to the left,or the passenger’sside power door lockswitch to the rightto unlock the trunk.

Emergency Trunk Release HandleNotice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as it coulddamage the handle. The emergency trunkrelease handle is only intended to aid a persontrapped in a latched trunk, enabling them toopen the trunk from the inside.

There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located on the trunk latch of thetrunk lid. This handle will glow following exposure tolight. If ever needed, pull the emergency trunkrelease handle to open the trunk from the inside.Driver’s Side

97

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

98

Power Windows

Use the switches on thedriver’s door to operateeach of the windows.

Push the switch down or up to open or close thewindow. The top switches operate the frontwindows, and the bottom switches operate therear windows.

Each passenger door also has a switch, locatedon the armrest, that operates that window.Push the switch rearward or forward to open orclose the window.

The power window switches only work if the ignitionis on or in ACC, or while Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 106 for more information.

Express-Down WindowThe driver’s window switch has an express-downfeature. This allows the window to open fully withouthaving to continuously hold the switch. Tap theswitch down, and the driver’s window will open asmall amount. Press the switch fully down andrelease and the window will go all the way down.

To stop the window while it is lowering, press thebottom of the switch. To raise the window,press and hold the bottom of the switch.

Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): The driver’s windowswitch includes a lockout feature located abovethe power window switches on the driver’sdoor. Move the switch to the right to prevent thepassengers sitting in the rear from using theirwindow switches. The driver can still control all thewindows with the lockout on. Move the switch tothe left to disengage the lockout feature.

99

Sun VisorsTo help block out glare, pull the sun visors down.Pull on the inside edges of the sun visors toswing them from the front windshield to the sidewindow.

Visor Vanity MirrorRaise the cover on the top of the sun visor toexpose the vanity mirror. If the vehicle has lightedvanity mirrors, the lamps come on when thecover is opened.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentThe vehicle has a content theft-deterrent alarmsystem.

A red light located on topof the instrument panel,toward the center of thevehicle and near thewindshield, will flashslowly when the systemis armed.

The theft-deterrent alarm system needs to beactivated through the Driver’s InformationCenter (DIC). See “Theft Deterrent” under thePersonal Programming Mode Screens in DICVehicle Customization on page 226. While armed,the doors will not unlock with the power door lockswitch. The remote alarm will sound if someonetampers with the trunk or enters the vehicle withoutusing the remote keyless entry transmitter or key tounlock the doors. The horn will sound and theheadlamps will flash for up to two minutes. Thesystem will also cut off the fuel supply, preventingthe vehicle from being driven.

100

Arming with the Power Lock SwitchThe vehicle’s content theft-deterrent alarm systemcan be activated when the key is removed fromthe ignition and the power door lock switchof either the driver’s or front passenger’s door isused to lock the vehicle. The door needs tobe in the open position when pressing the powerdoor lock switch. The alarm system will notactivate if the door is closed and the power doorlock switch is pressed. This system can beactivated through the Driver’s InformationCenter (DIC). See “Lock Switch Arm” under thePersonal Programming Mode Screens in DICVehicle Customization on page 226.

When the doors are locked using the power doorlock switch of either front door, the red light,on top of the instrument panel will start flashingindicating that the system is arming. After allthe doors are closed there will be a time delay andthen the red light will begin to flash at a veryslow rate indicating the system is armed.

Arming with the Remote Keyless EntryTransmitterThe alarm system will arm when the remote keylessentry transmitter is used to lock the doors after thekey is removed from the ignition. The red light willcome on to indicate that the system is arming. Afterall doors are closed and locked, and after a timedelay, the red light will begin flashing at a very slowrate to show the system is armed.

Arming ConfirmationA red light located on top of the instrument panel,towards the center of the vehicle and near thewindshield, will flash slowly to confirm whenthe system is armed.

Disarming with the Remote KeylessEntry TransmitterThe alarm system will disarm when the remotekeyless entry transmitter is used to unlockthe doors. The red light will go out to show thatthe system is disarmed.

101

Disarming with Your KeyThe alarm system will disarm when the key isused to unlock the doors. The red light will stopflashing when the system is disarmed. If you wouldlike the key to disarm the alarm system, see“Personal Programming Mode Screens” under DICVehicle Customization on page 226 for moreinformation.

PASS-Key® IIIYour PASS-Key® III system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:




PASS-Key® III uses a radio frequency transponderin the key that matches a decoder in yourvehicle.

102

PASS-Key® III Operation

The vehicle isequipped withPASS-Key® III(PersonalizedAutomotive SecuritySystem) theft-deterrentsystem. PASS-Key® IIIis a passivetheft-deterrentsystem.

This means nothing special needs to be done toarm or disarm the system. It works when the key isinserted or removed from the ignition.

PASS-Key® III uses a transponder in the ignitionkey that matches a decoder in the vehicle.

When the PASS-Key® III system senses that thewrong key has been inserted into the ignition, itshuts down the vehicle’s starter and fuel systems.

The starter will not work and fuel will stop flowing tothe engine. If someone tries to start the vehicleagain with the wrong key, the vehicle will not start.Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start thevehicle will be discouraged to do so because of thehigh number of electrical key codes.

When trying to start the vehicle, if the engine doesnot start and the STARTING DISABLED DUE TOTHEFT SYSTEM warning message on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) comes on, the key mayhave a damaged transponder. Turn the ignition offand try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignition key.At this time, you may also want to check the fuse.See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 460. If theengine still does not start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicle does start, thefirst key may be faulty. See your dealer who canservice the PASS-Key® III to have a new key made.In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 498 formore information.

103

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III decoderto accept the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. If all the programmedkeys are lost or do not operate, see your GM dealeror a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III tohave keys made and programmed to the system.

Canadian Owners: If all the keys are lost ordamaged, only a GM dealer can servicePASS-Key® III to have new keys made andprogrammed to the system.

The following procedure is for programming a newor replacement key when you have at least onealready programmed key. To program the new keydo the following:

1. Verify that the new key has PK3 stamped on it.

2. Insert the master key in the ignition and startthe engine. If the engine will not start, seeyour dealer for service.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toOFF, and remove the key.

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it toRUN within five seconds of removing theoriginal key.

5. The STARTING DISABLED DUE TO THEFTSYSTEM warning message on the DIC willturn off, once the key has been programmed.It may not be apparent that the SERVICETHEFT SYSTEM warning message went ondue to how quickly the key is programmed.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If the STARTING DISABLED DUE TO THEFTSYSTEM warning message appears and stays onthe DIC while the vehicle is being driven, theengine will be able to be restarted if it is turnedoff. Your PASS-Key® III system, however, isnot working properly and must be serviced byyour dealer. The vehicle is not protected bythe PASS-Key® III system at this time.

If the PASS-Key® III key is lost or stolen, seeyour dealer or a locksmith who can servicePASS-Key® III to have a new key made.

104

Starting and Operating YourVehicleNew Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast

or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km).Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 324 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

Ignition PositionsThe ignition switch is located on the instrumentpanel, to the right of the steering column.

There are four differentpositions. Insert the keyin the ignition andturn it to the right foreach position.

9 (OFF): This position locks the ignition,steering wheel and transaxle. It is a theft-deterrentfeature. This is the only position from which thekey can be removed.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage or breakthe key. Use the correct key and turn the keyonly with your hand. Make sure the key is all theway in. If it is, turn the steering wheel left andright while you turn the key hard. If none of thisworks, then your vehicle needs service.

105

ACC (ACCESSORY): This position allows thingslike the radio and windshield wipers to operatewhile the engine is off.

R (RUN): This position is where the key returnsto after the vehicle is started. With the engineoff, the RUN position displays some of the warningand indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACC or RUN position with the engineoff. You may not be able to start your vehicle ifthe battery is allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

/ (START): This position starts the engine. Letgo of the key when the engine starts. The key willreturn to the RUN for normal driving.

A continuous warning chime will sound and a KEYIN IGNITION message will display on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) if the key is turnedto OFF or ACC and the driver’s door is opened.

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)If the vehicle has Retained AccessoryPower (RAP), certain features will continue tooperate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition keyis turned to OFF unless a door is opened.

106

Starting the EnginePlace the transaxle in the proper gear.

Move your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position — this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shift intoPARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transaxle gentlyto allow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components.If the ignition key is turned to the STARTposition, and then released when the enginebegins cranking, the engine will continuecranking for a few seconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does not start and thekey is held in START for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage. To preventgear damage, this system also preventscranking if the engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stopped by turning theignition switch to the ACC or OFF position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

107

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. Ifthe vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transaxle gently until theoil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterThe vehicle may be equipped with an enginecoolant heater. In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C)or colder, the engine coolant heater can help.The vehicle will start easier and get betterfuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, thecoolant heater should be plugged in a minimumof four hours prior to starting the vehicle. Attemperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolantheater is not required. Your vehicle may alsohave an internal thermostat in the plug end of thecord. This will prevent operation of the enginecoolant heater when the temperature is at or above0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

108

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The cord is located above the engineair cleaner/filter. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 346 for more information onlocation.

3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before, makingsure to keep it away from moving engine parts.If this is not done, the cord could be damaged.

How long should the coolant heater be keptplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil that is in the vehicle,and some other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer in the area where the vehicle will be parked.The dealer can give you the best advice for thatparticular area.

Active Fuel Management™Your vehicle’s engine may be equipped withActive Fuel Management™. This system allowsthe engine to operate on either all or half ofits cylinders, depending on your driving conditions.

When less power is required, such as cruisingat a constant vehicle speed, the system willoperate in the half cylinder mode, allowing yourvehicle to achieve better fuel economy. Whengreater power demands are required, suchas accelerating from a stop, passing, or mergingonto a freeway, the system will maintainfull-cylinder operation.

109

Automatic Transaxle OperationThe shift lever for the automatic transaxle islocated on the console between the seats.

Maximum engine speed is limited when the vehicleis in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to protectdriveline components from improper operation.

There are severaldifferent positions forthe shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks the front wheels.It is the best position to use when the engineis started because the vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 116. If youare pulling a trailer, see Towing a Traileron page 324.

3800 V6 Engine

110

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. The vehicle hasan automatic transaxle shift lock control system.You must fully apply your regular brakes firstand then press the shift lever button, located onthe front of the shift lever, before you can shift fromPARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN.If the vehicle cannot be shifted out of PARK (P),ease pressure on the shift lever by pushing itall the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then press the shift lever buttonand move the shift lever into another gear.See Shifting Out of Park (P) on page 117.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice or sand without damaging the transaxle,see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice,or Snow on page 316.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, the engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenthe vehicle is already moving, use NEUTRAL (N)only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when the vehicleis being towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

111

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Itprovides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. Ifthe vehicle needs more power for passing, and it is:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push theaccelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator pedal all the way down.The vehicle will shift down to the next gear andhave more power.

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see Skiddingunder Loss of Control on page 301.

Notice: If your vehicle seems to start uprather slowly or not shift gears when you gofaster, and you continue to drive your vehiclethat way, you could damage the transaxle.Have your vehicle serviced right away. You candrive in SECOND (2) when you are drivingless than 35 mph (55 km/h) and DRIVE (D) forhigher speeds until then.

THIRD (3): This position is also used for normaldriving. However, it reduces vehicle speed morethan DRIVE (D) without using your brakes. Youmight choose THIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D)when driving on hilly, winding roads, when towing atrailer, so there is less shifting between gears, whengoing down a steep hill and when driving onnon-highway scenarios (i.e. city streets etc.).

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than THIRD (3) without using yourbrakes. You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It canhelp control the vehicle’s speed as it goesdown steep mountain roads, but then you wouldalso want to use the brakes off and on.

Notice: Driving in SECOND (2) for more than25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph(90 km/h), can cause damage to your engineand/or transaxle. Also, shifting into SECOND (2)at speeds above 65 mph (105 km/h) can causedamage. Drive in DRIVE (D) instead ofSECOND (2).

112

FIRST (1): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than SECOND (2) without usingyour brakes. It can be used on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is movedto FIRST (1), while the vehicle is moving forward,the transaxle will not shift into first gear untilthe vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

Performance Shifting with TAP-Shift®

If the vehicle is equipped with the 3800 V6Supercharged engine or the 5.3L V8 engine, yourvehicle may have this feature. It allows you tochange gears similar to a manual transaxle.

To fully use this feature, do the following:

1. The MANUAL (M) position can be selectedwhile the vehicle is moving. The currenttransaxle position will continue to be displayedon the Driver Information Center (DIC) andHead-Up Display (HUD), if equipped.

2. Move the shift leverto the MANUAL (M).

3. The paddles arelocated on thesteering wheel.They are used toup-shift or down-shiftthe transaxle.

113

4. Push either paddle once to up-shift to the nextgear. Pull either paddle once to down-shift tothe next gear.The vehicle will begin moving in first gear uponacceleration. For better control in icy or slipperyconditions, the vehicle may start out inSECOND (2), rather than FIRST (1). Thiswill only occur if you have “tapped up” tosecond gear.

The up-shift light on theinstrument panel cluster,or the up-shift symbol onthe HUD, if equipped, isgiven as a prompt to usethe TAP-Shift® paddle.

For more information, see Up-Shift Light onpage 175.

The up-shift light will only appear in the instrumentpanel cluster if the HUD is off or if the vehicledoes not have HUD.

This prompt to up-shift, as needed, will be giventhroughout acceleration. If up-shifting does notoccur when prompted, the vehicle speed will belimited to protect the engine.

The gear position will display on the DIC andHUD, if equipped, when in manual mode.

Pressing the accelerator while driving in thehighest gear (FOURTH (4)) between 20 mph(32 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h), will makethe transaxle automatically downshift. As yourspeed gets closer to 50 mph (80 km/h), youwill need to increase accelerator pedal travel toget the vehicle to downshift. At 50 mph (80 km/h),even with the accelerator fully depressed, thetransaxle will always remain in FOURTH (4). Thetransaxle will also automatically downshift asthe vehicle decelerates and comes to a stop.

If a paddle is pushed or pulled and the vehiclecannot respond to a transaxle gear change,a chime will sound. The system will not allow eitheran up-shift or a down-shift if the vehicle speedis too fast or too slow, nor will it allow a start fromTHIRD (3) or higher gear.

114

Parking Brake

The parking brake islocated to the left of thebrake pedal near thedriver’s door. To set theparking brake, holdthe regular brake pedaldown with the rightfoot. Push down on theparking brake pedal,with the left foot.

To release the parking brake, hold the regularbrake pedal down with the right foot and push theparking brake pedal with the left foot. When theleft foot is lifted, the parking brake pedal will lift tothe released position.

A warning chime will sound if the parking brake isset, the ignition is on, and the shift lever is notin PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).

The brake light will also appear on the instrumentpanel cluster when the parking brake is set. It willstay on if the parking brake does not release fully.

The PARKING BRAKE ON message will alsoappear in the Driver Information Center (DIC)when the parking brake is set. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 200 for more information.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If the vehicle is towing a trailer and parked on ahill, see Towing a Trailer on page 324. Thatsection shows what to do first to keep the trailerfrom moving.

115

Shifting Into Park (P)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.Your vehicle can roll. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move, evenwhen you are on fairly level ground, usethe steps that follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 324.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingin the button on the shift lever and pushingthe shift lever all the way toward the frontof the vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you

can leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

Leaving Your Vehicle With theEngine Running

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your vehicle with the enginerunning, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) andyour parking brake is firmly set before you leave it.After you have moved the shift lever into PARK (P),hold the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if youcan move the shift lever away from PARK (P)without first pushing the button.If you can, it means that the shift lever was notfully locked in PARK (P).

116

Torque LockIf you are parking on a hill and you do not shift yourtransaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of thevehicle may put too much force on the parking pawlin the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called torquelock. To prevent torque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into PARK (P) properly before youleave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see ShiftingInto Park (P) on page 116.

When you are ready to drive, move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) before you release theparking brake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push your vehicle a little uphillto take some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, so you can pull the shift leverout of PARK (P).

Shifting Out of Park (P)The vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system which locks the shift lever inPARK (P) when the ignition is in OFF. In addition,the regular brakes must be fully applied beforeshifting from PARK (P) while the ignition is in RUN.See Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 110.

If the vehicle cannot be shifted out of PARK (P),ease pressure on the shift lever and push theshift lever all the way up into PARK (P) as brakeapplication is maintained. Then move the shift leverinto the desired gear.

If the brake pedal is held down but the vehicle stillcannot be shifted out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the key to ACC or RUN.

2. Apply and hold the brake until the end ofStep 4.

3. Shift the transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).

4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the desiredtransaxle gear.

5. Have the system fixed as soon as possible.

117

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

118

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• Your exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or exhaust system has

been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

119

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 119.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 311.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) onpage 116.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 324.

120

Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar®

Your vehicle has this feature located at the bottomof the mirror, to change the mirror from the dayto the night position. To reduce the glare ofheadlamps from behind, turn the controlcounterclockwise. To return the mirror tothe day position, turn the control clockwise.

There are also three OnStar® buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror face. See your dealerfor more information on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar® Systemon page 122 for more information about theservices OnStar® provides.

Outside Power Mirrors

The power mirrorcontrols are locatednear the driver’swindow, on the driver’sdoor armrest.

Move the top control to the left to adjust thedriver’s side outside mirror. Move the control tothe right to adjust the passenger’s side mirror. Thecenter position turns the power control off andwill not allow the mirrors to move if the control padis touched.

The round control pad adjusts the angle of theselected outside mirror. Press the arrows on thecontrol pad to adjust the angle of the mirror.Adjust each mirror so that the sides and the areabehind the vehicle can be seen.

121

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s outside rearview mirror isconvex. The surface is curved so more area canbe seen from the driver’s seat. It also make thingslook farther away than they really are.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signalto unlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

122

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You may cancelyour OnStar® service at any time by contactingOnStar® as provided below. A complete OnStar®

Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms andConditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar®

Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contactOnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) orTTY 1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day,7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.For more information, press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

123

Available Services with Safe & Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)

(If equipped)• Link to Emergency Services• Roadside Assistance• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance• AccidentAssist• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with

30 complimentary minutes• OnStar® Virtual Advisor ( U.S. Only)

Available Services included withDirections & Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or

OnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)• RideAssist• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a BellMobility service plan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owners Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak withan OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®

button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See the OnStar®

Owners Guide for more information (Only availablein the continental U.S.).

124

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 277 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys.

The vehicle information usually includes your GPSlocation and, in the event of a crash, additionalinformation regarding the accident that your vehiclehas been involved in (e.g. the direction fromwhich your vehicle was hit). When you use theVirtual Advisor feature of OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling, your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

125

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®

equipment is active.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by lifting up on the lever.Close the glove box with a firm push.

Cupholder(s)There are two cupholders in the front of the centerconsole.

Cupholder Installation and Removal

Your vehicle may also have a rear cupholder thatcan be installed by aligning it to the consoleand snapping it into place. To remove, pull it upfrom the console.

126

Sunglasses Storage CompartmentYour vehicle may have a storage compartmentlocated to the rear on the overhead console.To open the sunglasses storage compartment,press the release latch forward and pull thecompartment down.

Front Seat Storage NetIf the vehicle has a fold-flat front passenger seat,a storage net is attached to the seatback.It cannot be removed from the seat.

Center Console Storage AreaTo open the armrest storage area, pull up on thelatch located on the front drivers side of thestorage area. The storage area may have acassette/compact disc holder. A storage pocket islocated on the passenger side of the console.

Assist HandlesThe vehicle has lighted assist handles locatedabove the rear doors. They can be used to helppassengers enter and exit the vehicle.

The lamps on the handles will come onautomatically when a door is opened, and turn offwhen the door is closed. If the lamps have grooveson each lens, they can manually be turned on or offby pressing the sides.

Your vehicle may have a rear coat hook availableunder the rear assist handle on each side of thevehicle.

Convenience NetThe vehicle may have a convenience net locatedon the back wall of the trunk.

Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net.It can help keep them from falling over.

The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Storethose in the trunk as far forward as possible.

Unhook the net so that it will lie flat when not in use.

127

SunroofIf the vehicle has a sunroof, it includes a slidingglass panel and a sunshade.

The switch to controlthe sunroof is locatedin the headliner.

The switch works only while the ignition is on, or inACC, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is on.See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) onpage 106.

Vent: Open the sunshade by hand. Push the switchtoward the rear of the vehicle once and the sunroofwill open to the vent position. Push the switchforward to close.

Open/Express-Open: Push the switch toward therear of the vehicle a second time and the sunroofwill open the remainder of the way. The sunshadewill open with the sunroof if the switch is pushedtoward the rear of the vehicle twice.

Close: Push and hold the front of the switch untilthe sunroof motor stops. The sunshade mustbe closed by hand.

128

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 132Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 134Other Warning Devices ............................. 134Horn .......................................................... 134Tilt Wheel .................................................. 135Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 135Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 136Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 137Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 137Windshield Wiper Lever ............................. 138Cruise Control ........................................... 140Exterior Lamps .......................................... 144Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 145Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 145Fog Lamps ................................................ 146Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................. 146Interior Lamps ........................................... 146Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 147Courtesy Lamps ........................................ 147Dome Lamp .............................................. 147Entry Lighting ............................................ 148Delayed Entry Lighting .............................. 148Delayed Exit Lighting ................................. 149Front Reading Lamps ................................ 149Overhead Console Reading Lamps ........... 149

Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps .......... 149Electric Power Management ...................... 150Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 151Head-Up Display (HUD) ............................ 151Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 156Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 157

Climate Controls ......................................... 157Climate Control System ............................. 157Dual Automatic Climate Control System .... 162Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 166Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 166

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 168Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 169Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 170Tachometer ............................................... 171Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 171Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 172Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 172Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 173Up-Shift Light ............................................ 175Brake System Warning Light ..................... 176Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 177Low Tire Pressure Warning Light .............. 178

Section 3 Instrument Panel

129

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light ........................................ 178

Enhanced Traction SystemWarning Light ........................................ 179

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light ........................................ 179

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 180Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 180Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 184Fog Lamp Light ......................................... 185Cruise Control Light .................................. 185Highbeam On Light ................................... 185Fuel Gage ................................................. 185

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 186DIC Controls and Displays

(Base Level DIC) ................................... 186DIC Controls and Displays

(Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) ........... 190DIC Compass (Uplevel DIC) ...................... 198DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 200DIC Vehicle Customization ........................ 226

Audio System(s) ......................................... 233Setting the Time ........................................ 234Radio with CD (Base Level) ...................... 235Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 245Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 255Using an MP3 ........................................... 269XM Radio Messages ................................. 275Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 277Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 277Radio Reception ........................................ 278Care of Your CDs ..................................... 279Care of the CD Player .............................. 279Backglass Antenna .................................... 280XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 281Chime Level Adjustment ............................ 281

Section 3 Instrument Panel

130

✍ NOTES

131

Instrument Panel Overview

132

The main components of the instrument panel are the following:

A. Side Window Defogger Outlets. See OutletAdjustment on page 166.

B. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 166.C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever and Cruise

Controls. See Turn Signal/Multifunction Leveron page 135 and Cruise Control on page 140.

D. TAP-Shift® Control (If Equipped). SeeAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 110.

E. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 134.

F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 169.

G. Windshield Wiper Lever. See Windshield WiperLever on page 138.

H. Ignition. See Ignition Positions on page 105.I. Driver Information Center (DIC) (If Equipped).

See Driver Information Center (DIC) onpage 186.

J. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 233.

K. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 277.

L. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 345.M. Tilt Steering Wheel Lever, on Steering Column.

See Tilt Wheel on page 135.N. Interior Lamps Brightness Control. See Interior

Lamps on page 146.O. Passenger Air Bag Status Indicator. See

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 173.P. Climate Controls. See Climate Control

System on page 157.Q. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transaxle Operation

on page 110.R. Traction Control Button (If Equipped). See

Traction Control System (TCS) on page 292.S. Head Up Display (HUD) Control (If Equipped).

See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 151.T. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 126.U. Instrument Panel Fuse Block. See Instrument

Panel Fuse Block on page 460.

133

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers warn others. Theyalso let police know you have a problem.Your front and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedon top of the steeringcolumn.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatignition position the key is in, and even if thekey is not in the ignition.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

When the hazard warning flashers are on, yourturn signals will not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress on or near the horn symbols on the steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

134

Tilt WheelA tilt wheel enables the position of the steeringwheel to be adjusted. The lever that lets thesteering wheel tilt is located on the outboard sideof the steering column.

To tilt the steering wheel, hold it and pull the lever.Move the steering wheel to a comfortable drivingposition and release the lever to lock it into place.

Tilt the steering wheel to the highest position togive more room when exiting and enteringthe vehicle.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 136.

• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. SeeHeadlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 137.

• - Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 146.

135

• Flash-to-Pass Feature. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 137.

• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control onpage 140.

• P Exterior Lamps Control. See ExteriorLamps on page 144.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsTo signal a turn, move the turn signal lever locatedon the left side of the steering column all theway up or down. The lever returns automaticallywhen the turn is complete.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

If the vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up-Display(HUD), a right or left turn signal will appear inthe HUD area when making turns or lane changes.See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 151 formore information.

Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts toflash to signal a lane change. Hold it there until thelane change is complete. The lever returns to itsoriginal position when it is released.

Arrows that flash rapidly when signaling for a turnor lane change may be caused by a burned-outsignal bulb. Other drivers will not see the signal.

Replace burned-out bulbs to help avoid possibleaccidents. See Replacement Bulbs on page 398,Front Turn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps onpage 394, and Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplamps on page 395. Also, check the fuse forburned-out bulbs if a turn signal arrow fails towork when signaling a turn. See Fuses and CircuitBreakers on page 460 for location information.

Turn Signal On ChimeIf the turn signal is left on for more than0.75 of a mile (1.21 km), a warning chime willsound and the TURN SIGNAL ON warningmessage will appear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) display. See “Turn Signal On” underDIC Warnings and Messages on page 200.

136

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerPush forward on the exterior lamps controllever to change the headlamps from low tohigh-beam. Pull the lever back and then release itto change from high to low-beam.

This symbol appears onthe instrument panelcluster when thehigh-beam headlampsare on.

When the high-beam headlamps are on, the foglamps will not be on. If the vehicle is equipped withthe Head-Up-Display (HUD) an arrow will appearin the HUD area indicating that the high-beamsare on. See Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 151for more information.

Flash-to-PassThis feature allows the use of the high-beamheadlamps to signal the driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

Pull and hold the exterior lamps control lever touse this feature. When this is done, the followingwill occur:

• The high-beam headlamps will turn on, whilethe headlamps are off, in low-beam, or inDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) mode. Theywill stay on as long as the lever is held in thisposition. Release the lever to turn them off.

• The headlamps will switch to low beam if theheadlamps had been in the high-beammode. To return to high-beam, push the lever.

If the vehicle is equipped with the Head-Up Display(HUD), an arrow will appear on the display toindicate that the high beams are on.

137

Windshield Wiper LeverBe sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper bladesbefore using them. If they are frozen to thewindshield, gently loosen or thaw them. Damagedwiper blades may not clear the windshield well,making it harder to see and drive safely. If theblades do become damaged, install new blades orblade inserts. For more information, see WindshieldWiper Blade Replacement on page 399.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker will stop the motor until itcools down. Clear away snow or ice to prevent anoverload.

N (Windshield Wipers): The lever with thissymbol, located on the right side of the steeringcolumn, operates the windshield wipers.

9 (Off): Lower the lever to its original position toturn the wipers off.

& (Delay): Push the lever up once to thisposition to set a delay between wiping cycles. Turnthe delay adjustment band to set the length ofthe delay.

x (Delay Adjustment): Turn the band, locatedon the left of the windshield wiper lever, to setthe length of the delay between wiper cycles whenusing the delay feature. There are five delayadjustment settings. Turn the band up to make thedelays shorter in between wiper cycles. Turnthe band down to make the delays longer betweenwiper cycles. The windshield wiper lever mustbe in delay for this feature to work.

138

6 (Low Speed): Push the lever up to thesecond position for steady wiping cycles at a slowspeed.

1 (High Speed): Push the lever up to thethird position for steady wiping cycles at a highspeed.

7 (Mist): For a single wiping cycle, push thelever down once and let go. The wipers willstop after one cycle. For additional cycles, holdthe lever down.

About 30 seconds after the wipers are on, theheadlamps, taillamps, and instrument panellighting will come on, and the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) back lighting will decrease tothe night time mode. About ten seconds after thewipers are turned off, all the lamps will go backto the AUTO (Automatic) mode. See ExteriorLamps on page 144.

Windshield Washer

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

The windshield washer button is located at theend of the windshield wiper lever.

K (Washer Fluid): Press this button to activatethe washer fluid to spray onto the windshield.The wipers will run for a few cycles to clear thewindshield. For more wash cycles, press and holdthe button.

If the vehicle is low on washer fluid, the LOWWASHER FLUID message will appear onthe Driver Information Center (DIC) display. See“LOW WASHER FLUID” under DIC Warningsand Messages on page 200 for more information.

139

Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

9 (Off): This positionturns the system off.

R (On): This position activates the system.

+ (Resume/Accelerate): This position to makesthe vehicle accelerate or resume to a previouslyset speed.

T (Set): Press this button to set the speed.

With cruise control, you can maintain a speed ofabout 25 mph (40 km/h) or more withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator. This canreally help on long trips. Cruise control does notwork at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).

Cruise control will not work if your parking brake isset, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.

140

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

If cruise control is on when the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), if your vehicle has one, beginsto limit wheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 292. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, you may turncruise control back on.

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

1. Move the cruise control switch to on.2. Get up to the speed desired.3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever

and release it.4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

This symbol, along withthe CRUISE SETmessage, will brieflyappear in the DriverInformation Center (DIC)when the cruisecontrol is set.

141

The CRUISE SET message will also appearbriefly on the Head-Up Display (HUD), if yourvehicle has one, when the cruise control lever ispushed to the minus (set) or the plus(resume/accelerate) positions.

A cruise control light will also appear on theinstrument panel cluster when the cruise control ison. This light will disappear when the brakesare applied or the cruise control is cancelled. It willreappear when the set cruise speed is resumed.The light will go out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control Light on page 185.

Resuming a Set SpeedOnce you are going about 25 mph (40 km/h) ormore, you can move the cruise control switchbriefly from on to resume/accelerate.

Your vehicle will go back up to your previouslychosen speed and stay there.

If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate thevehicle will keep going faster until you release theswitch or apply the brake. Do not hold theswitch at resume/accelerate, unless you want thevehicle to go faster.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Press the set button at the end of thelever, then release the button and theaccelerator pedal. You will now cruise at thehigher speed. If the accelerator pedal isheld longer than 60 seconds, cruise controlwill turn off.

• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to thespeed desired, and then release the switch.To increase the vehicle speed in very smallamounts, move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate. Each time you do this, your vehiclewill go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

The acceleration feature will only work after thecruise control speed has been set by pushing thecruise control set button.

142

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise ControlThere are two ways to reduce the vehicle’s speedwhile using cruise control:

• Press and hold the set button until you reachthe lower speed desired, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts,briefly press the set button. Each time you dothis your vehicle will slow down aboutone mph (1.6 km/h).

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’sspeed. When you take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle will slow down to the cruise controlspeed set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control will work on hillsdepends upon the vehicle’s speed, its load, andthe steepness of the hills. When going upsteep hills, the accelerator pedal might have to beused in order to maintain the vehicle’s speed.When going downhill, the brakes might have to beapplied, or the transaxle might have to beshifted to a lower gear to keep the vehicle’s speeddown. Doing either of these things will take thevehicle out of cruise. It may be better not touse the cruise control if the brakes constantly haveto be applied, or the vehicle continuously needsto be shifted to a lower gear.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are two ways to turn off the cruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal

• Move the cruise control switch to off

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen the cruise control or the ignition is turnedoff, the cruise control set speed memory is erased.

143

Exterior Lamps

The exterior lamp control is located to the left ofthe steering wheel on the multifunction lever.

O (Exterior Lamp Control): Turn the band withthis symbol on it to operate the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp band has four positions:

O (Off): Turning the band to this position turnsoff all lamps.

AUTO (Automatic): Turning the band to thisposition sets the exterior lamps in automatic mode.AUTO mode will turn the exterior lamps on andoff depending on how much light is availableoutside the vehicle.

To override AUTO mode, turn the control to off.

To reset to AUTO mode turn the control to exteriorlamps and then back to AUTO. Automatic modewill also reset when your vehicle is turned offand then back on again when the control is left inthe AUTO position.

; (Parking Lamp): Turning the band to thisposition turns on the parking lamps together withthe following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamps

• Instrument Panel Lights

The parking brake indicator light will come on andstay on when the parking lamps are on with theengine off and the ignition to ACC.

5 (Headlamps): Turning the control to thisposition turns on the headlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

144

Headlamps on ReminderA warning chime will sound if the vehicle’s ignitionis off and the driver’s door is opened when theexterior lamp control is left on in either theheadlamp or parking lamp position.

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Daytime running lamps are required tofunction at all times on all vehicles first soldin Canada.

A light sensor on top of the instrument panelmakes the DRL work, so be sure it is not covered.

The DRL system will make the low-beamheadlamps come on at reduced brightness whenthe following conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps control is off.

• The parking brake is released.

While the DRL are on, only the vehicle’s low-beamheadlamps will be on at reduced brightness.The turn signal, taillamps, sidemarker and otherlamps will not be on. The instrument panel clusterwill not be lit up either.

When it is dark enough outside, the DRL will turnoff and the vehicle’s headlamps and parkinglamps will turn on. The other lamps that come onwith the headlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside, the headlampswill go off and the DRL will come on.

To idle the vehicle with the DRL off, turn theexterior lamp control off and then do one of thefollowing:

• Turn the exterior lamp control to the parkinglamp position.

• Turn the exterior lamp control to the headlampposition.

• Turn the exterior lamp control from AUTO tooff and back to AUTO.

This feature is not available for vehicles first soldin Canada.

145

To turn off the automatic headlamp feature when itis dark outside, move the exterior lamp controlto the parking lamp position. The parking lampswill remain illuminated and the headlamps will turnoff. The fog lamps will also go on if they wereon previously.

As with any vehicle, the regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.

Fog LampsIf equipped, fog lamps provide brighter roadwaylighting for better vision in foggy or mistyconditions.

- (Fog Lamps): Turn the second band on theexterior lamps control lever to this position toturn the fog lamps on. The band will return to itsoriginal position.

This symbol appears onthe instrument panelcluster when thefog lamps are on.

To turn the fog lamps off, turn the band up to thefog lamp symbol and release it. The band willreturn to its original position. If the high-beamheadlamps are on, the fog lamps will turn off. Thefog lamps will go on again when the low-beamheadlamps are turned back on.

The parking lamps must be on for the fog lampsto work.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Exterior Lighting Battery SaverIf the parking lamps or headlamps have been lefton after the ignition has been turned to off, theexterior lamps will turn off after about 10 minutes.This protects the battery from being drained.

Use the exterior lamp control to turn the lampsback on, if they are still needed.

Interior LampsThe interior lamps can be controlled, orautomatically turn on or off under certain conditions.They are explained in the following text.

146

Instrument Panel BrightnessThis feature controls the brightness of theinstrument panel lights.

The interior lampscontrol is located on theinstrument panel, tothe left of the steeringcolumn.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of theinstrument panel lights.

Courtesy LampsWhen a door is opened, the courtesy lamps willautomatically come on. These lamps will alsocome on when the interior lamps control is fullyturned clockwise.

Dome LampIf the vehicle does not have an overhead console,it will have a dome light located in the front ofthe headliner.

The switch on this lamp has three positions. Theon position will turn on the lamp anytime. Thedoor position will turn on the lamp whenevera door is opened. The off position will shut off thelamp completely, even while a door is opened.

147

Entry LightingThe entry lighting feature turns the interior lightson before anyone enters the vehicle. Theinterior lamps will come on for 40 seconds whenthe doors are unlocked using the remotekeyless entry transmitter and the ignition is inOFF. After 40 seconds have elapsed, the interiorlamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will fadeout before 40 seconds have elapsed if one of thefollowing is done:

• Lock all doors using the remote keyless entrytransmitter.

• Lock the doors using the power door lockswitch.

When any door is opened, entry lighting iscancelled. The interior lamps will stay on whileany door is opened and slowly fade out when alldoors are closed. The interior lamps may stayon for up to 25 seconds after all doors have beenclosed if they have not been locked.

Delayed Entry LightingThe delayed lighting feature will continue to lightthe interior of the vehicle for 25 seconds afterall the doors have been closed. Delayed lightingwill not occur while the ignition is in RUN or ACC.After 25 seconds have elapsed, the interiorlamps will slowly fade out. The lamps will fade outbefore the 25 seconds have elapsed if one ofthe following is done:

• The ignition is turned to RUN or ACC.

• The doors are locked using the remote keylessentry transmitter.

• The doors are locked using the power doorlock switch.

To turn the delayed lighting feature off or on, see“Personal Programming Modes” under DICVehicle Customization on page 226 DIC Controlsand Displays.

148

Delayed Exit LightingFor exiting the vehicle at night, the vehicle isequipped with the delayed exit lighting feature. Afterthe key is removed from the ignition, the interiorlamps will light for up the amount of seconds set inthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See “PersonalProgramming Mode Screens” under DIC VehicleCustomization on page 226. After the set time haselapsed, the interior lamps will slowly fade. Thelamps will fade before the set time has elapsed ifone of the following is done:


• The doors are locked using the remote keylessentry transmitter.

• The doors are locked using the power door lockswitch.

When any door is opened, delayed exit lighting iscancelled. The interior lamps will stay on whileany door is opened and will slowly fade out whenall the doors are closed. The interior lamps willstay on for the set time after all the doorshave been closed if they have not been locked.

To turn the delayed exit lighting feature off or on,see “Personal Programming Mode Screens”under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 226.

Front Reading LampsIf the vehicle has a sunroof, there are readinglamps in front of the sunroof switch located on theheadliner. These lamps will come on when thedoors are opened. Press the side of each readinglamp to turn them on and off when the doorsare closed.

Overhead Console Reading LampsThe vehicle may have reading lamps on theoverhead console. These lamps will turn on whenthe doors are opened. When the doors areclosed, press the side of each lamp to turn themon and off.

Rear Assist Handle Reading LampsIf the vehicle has a reading lamp on each rearassist handle, press the side of each lamp to turnit on or off.

149

Electric Power ManagementThe vehicle has Electric Power Management(EPM) that estimates the battery’s temperature andstate of charge. It then adjusts the voltage forbest performance and extended life of the battery.

When the battery’s state of charge is low, thevoltage is raised slightly to quickly put the chargeback in. When the state of charge is high, thevoltage is lowered slightly to prevent overcharging.If the vehicle has a voltmeter gage or voltagedisplay on the Driver Information Center (DIC), youmay see the voltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, an alert will bedisplayed.

The battery can be discharged at idle if theelectrical loads are very high. This is true for allvehicles. This is because the generator (alternator)may not be spinning fast enough at idle toproduce all the power that is needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs when several of thefollowing loads are on: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger, climatecontrol fan at high speed, heated seats, enginecooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of thebattery. It does this by balancing the generator’soutput and the vehicle’s electrical needs. Itcan increase engine idle speed to generate morepower, whenever needed. It can temporarilyreduce the power demands of some accessories.

Normally, these actions occur in steps or levels,without being noticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action, this action maybe noticeable to the driver. If so, a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message might bedisplayed, such as Battery Saver Active. If thismessage is displayed, it is recommended that thedriver reduce the electrical loads as much aspossible. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 200.

150

Battery Run-Down ProtectionThe vehicle has a feature to help prevent thebattery from draining in case the interior, trunk, orunderhood lamps are accidentally left on. Ifany of these lamps are left on while the ignition isin OFF, they will automatically turn off after10 minutes. The lamps will not come back onagain until any of the following are done:


• The interior lamps control is turned completelyto the right, then back slightly to the left.

• Open, or close and reopen, a door that isclosed.

If the vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) onthe odometer, the battery saver will turn offthe lamps after only three minutes.

Head-Up Display (HUD)

{CAUTION:

If the HUD image is too bright or too highin your field of view, it may take you moretime to see things you need to see when itis dark outside. Be sure to keep the HUDimage dim and placed low in your fieldof view.

If the vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD),some information concerning the operation of thevehicle is projected onto the windshield. Thisincludes the speedometer reading, transaxlepositions, compass direction, outside airtemperature, the tap shift gear and the upshiftsymbol if active, and a brief display of the currentradio station, including XM information or CDtrack. It will also display turn-by-turn guidanceinformation if the vehicle is has a navigation radio.The images are projected by the HUD lenslocated on the driver’s side of the instrument panel.

151

The tap shift gear and the upshift symbol will alsoappear on the HUD if the vehicle has tap shiftand it is active.

The HUD information can be displayed in one ofthree languages, English, French, or Spanish. Thespeedometer reading and other numerical valuescan be displayed in either English or metric units.

The language selection and the units ofmeasurement are changed through the tripcomputer in the Driver Information Center (DIC).See “Options” under DIC Controls and Displays(Base Level DIC) on page 186 or DIC Controls andDisplays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) onpage 190. The HUD information appears as an image

focused out toward the front of the vehicle.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN, the HUDwill display an introductory message for a shorttime, until the HUD has warmed up.

The following indicator lights come on theinstrument panel when activated and will alsoappear on the HUD:

• Turn Signal Indicators

• High-Beam Indicator Symbol

152

The HUD will temporarily display CHECK TRIPCOMPUTER when there are messages on the DICtrip computer.

The HUD will also display the following messageswhen these systems, if the vehicle has them,are active:

• TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE

• STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE

The HUD will temporarily display the TRACTIONCONTROL OFF message when the tractioncontrol system is turned off.

The HUD will temporarily display the CRUISE SETmessage when cruise control is activated orcruise speed is increased.

Notice: If you try to use the HUD image as aparking aid, you may misjudge the distanceand damage your vehicle. Do not use the HUDimage as a parking aid.

When the HUD is on, the speedometer readingwill continually be displayed. The current radiostation or CD track number will display for a shortperiod of time after the radio or CD track statuschanges. This will happen whenever one ofthe radio controls is pressed.

The speedometer size will be reduced when radio,CD information, warnings, or turn-by-turnguidance information are displayed on the HUD.

The HUD control islocated on the console.

To adjust the HUD image so that items areproperly displayed, do the following:

1. Adjust the driver’s seat to a comfortableposition.

2. Start the engine.

3. Adjust the HUD controls.

Use the following settings to adjust the HUD.

9 (Off): Turn the outer ring on the HUD controlto this position to turn the HUD off.

153

I II III IIII (Brightness): Turn the outer ring on theHUD control clockwise to dim the display andcounterclockwise to brighten it.

w (Up): Press this portion of the switch on theHUD control to move the image up.

x (Down): Press this portion of the switch onthe HUD control to move the image down.Move the image as low as possible on thewindshield, keeping it in full view.

? (Page): Press this button to select the displayformats. Release the page button when theformat number with the desired display is shownon the HUD.

• Format One: This display gives thespeedometer reading (in English or metricunits), transaxle positions, compass direction,and the outside air temperature.

• Format Two: This display includes theinformation in Format One without the compassdirection and the outside air temperature.

• Format Three: This display includes all theinformation in Format One, but turns theinstrument cluster lighting off. Format three isonly available at night.

All formats will show the turn-by-turn guidanceinformation. It will display the next turn, direction,street name, and distance to the selecteddestination. When you near your destination, theHUD will display a distance bar that will fill inthe closer you get to your destination. Allnavigation information is provided to the HUD bythe navigation radio, if the vehicle has one.

The warning indicators still appear on theinstrument panel when required. The HUD willdisplay Stealth Mode On.

The HUD will store the last display format selected.If the last format displayed was Format One orFormat Three, then Format One will be displayedwhen the vehicle is started.

If the last format was Format Two, then FormatTwo will be displayed.

154

The HUD image displayed on the windshield willautomatically dim and brighten to compensatefor outside lighting.

The HUD image can temporarily light updepending on the angle and position of thesunlight on the HUD display. This is normal andwill change when the angle of the sunlight onthe HUD display changes.

Polarized sunglasses could make the HUD imageharder to see.

Care of the HUDClean the inside of the windshield as needed toremove any dirt or film that could reduce thesharpness or clarity of the HUD image.

To clean the HUD lens, use a soft, clean cloth thathas household glass cleaner sprayed on it.Wipe the HUD lens gently, then dry it. Do notspray cleaner directly on the lens becausethe cleaner could leak into the unit.

If You Cannot See the HUD ImageWhen the Ignition Is On• Is anything covering the HUD lens?

• Is the HUD dimmer setting bright enough?

• Is the HUD image adjusted to the properheight?

• Are you wearing polarized sunglasses?

• Still no HUD image? Check the fuse in theinstrument panel fuse block. See InstrumentPanel Fuse Block on page 460.

If the HUD Image Is Not Clear• Is the HUD image too bright?

• Are the windshield and HUD lens clean?

If the HUD image is not correct, contact yourdealer.

Keep in mind that the windshield is part of theHUD system. See Windshield Replacementon page 399.

155

Accessory Power Outlet(s)

The vehicle has two12-volt outlets whichcan be used to plug inelectrical equipment.

One accessory power outlet is located on thecenter console, below the front edge of the storageconsole. The other is located inside the console.

Remove the tethered cap to use the outlet.When not using the outlet, be sure to cover it withthe protective cap.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment pluggedin for an extended period of time while thevehicle is off will drain the battery. Power isalways supplied to the outlets. Always unplugelectrical equipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum 20 ampere rating.

Certain electrical accessories may not becompatible with the accessory power outlet andcould result in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. Seeyour dealer for additional information onaccessory power outlets.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer before adding electricalequipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith it.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

156

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette LighterYour vehicle may have a removable muffintin ashtray and cigarette lighter. The muffin tinashtray can be placed into the front center consolecupholder. To use the lighter, located on thecenter console, push it in all the way and let go.When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating will not allow the lighter to backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating may occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter inwhile it is heating.

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemThe climate control system allows manual controlof the heating, cooling, and ventilation in thevehicle.

157

Fan

9 (Fan): Turn the knob by this symbol, located onthe left side of the climate control panel, clockwiseor counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. The fan speed will be temporarily reducedbetween the transition to a new mode. The fan willresume the original speed when the transition to thenew mode is complete.

9 (Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn theclimate control system off. Only the heated seatand/or rear defrost can be operated when the fanis off.

ModeTurn the middle knob to select the following modes:

H (Vent) (Outside Air): This mode directsoutside air to the instrument panel outlets. If drivingin city traffic, and the vehicle is stopped andidling, or the weather is hot, press the recirculationbutton. To prevent the air inside the vehiclefrom becoming stale, be sure to turn offrecirculation periodically.

) (Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air tothe instrument panel outlets, and the remainingair to the floor outlets. Some air may be directedtoward the windshield. Slightly cooler air is directedto the instrument panel outlets and warmer air isdirected to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed towardthe side window outlets and a little air directed tothe windshield.

In this mode, the system will automatically useoutside air. The air conditioning compressor willbe engaged unless the outside temperatureis 40°F (4°C) or below.

Recirculation cannot be selected when in thismode even though the indicator light comes onwhen the recirculation button is pressed.

The middle knob on the climate control panel canalso be used to select the defog or defrost mode.

158

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of the vehicle is a result of highhumidity causing moisture to condense on the coolwindow glass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear frost or fog from the windshield.Use the defog mode to clear the windows ofcondensation and to warm the vehicle’s occupants.Use the defrost mode to remove frost orcondensation from the windshield quickly.

See “Rear Window Defogger” later in this sectionfor information on clearing the rear window offog or ice.

. (Floor/Defog): Use the floor/defog mode toclear the windows of fog or moisture and towarm the passengers. This mode directs the airequally between the windshield and the flooroutlets, along with some directed to the sidewindow outlets.

This mode will automatically use outside air. Theair conditioning compressor will be engagedunless the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) orbelow. Recirculation cannot be selected whenin this mode even though the indicator light comeson when the recirculation button is pressed.

1 (Defrost): Use the defrost mode to removefog or frost from the windshield more quickly. Thismode directs most of the air to the windshieldand the side window outlets, with some air directedto the floor outlets. This mode has a timer andwill shut off after five minutes.

This mode will automatically use outside air. Theair conditioning compressor will be engagedunless the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) orbelow. Recirculation cannot be selected whenin this mode even though the indicator light comeson when the recirculation button is pressed.

TemperatureThe knob on the right of the climate control panelis the temperature adjustment that can be usedwith any of the climate control modes.

Turn the knob clockwise for warmer settings andcounterclockwise for colder settings.

159

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioner): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning compressor on or off. Anindicator light to the right of the button will comeon. This button has no control over the airconditioning compressor when in Floor/Defog andDefrost modes. The instrument panel brightnesscontrol may have to be adjusted to the highestsetting in order to see the indicator. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 147 foradditional information.

On hot days during the vehicle’s initial start-up,open the windows to let hot inside air escape; thenclose them. This helps to reduce the time ittakes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helpsthe system to operate more efficiently.

For quicker cool down on hot days, do thefollowing:

1. Select any mode setting between vent andthe setting before defrost.

2. Select the air conditioner.

3. Select the coolest temperature.

4. Select the highest climate control fan speed.

Using these settings will set recirculation for quickercool down (the light indicator will not turn on).If outside air is desired, press the recirculationbutton twice.

Using these settings together for long periods oftime may cause the air inside the vehicle tobecome too dry. To prevent this from happening,after five minutes the recirculation door willopen slightly to allow some outside air into thevehicle.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so sometimes there may be a smallamount of water dripping underneath thevehicle while it is idling or after the engine isturned off. This is normal.

Recirculation

h (Recirculation): Press this button toactivate the recirculation mode. With this selection,inside air is recirculated into the vehicle. Thismode reduces outside air and odors from enteringthe vehicle. It may also help to heat or cool theair inside the vehicle more quickly.

160

An indicator light to the right of the button willcome on to show that the recirculation button hasbeen pressed. The instrument panel brightnesscontrol may have to be adjusted to the highestsetting to see the indicator.

The recirculation mode has a timer. Afterfive minutes, the system’s air inlet door will moveslightly to allow for ten percent fresh outsideair to maintain interior air quality. The only way toreset the system to full recirculation is to restartthe five minute timer by selecting vent/outside airand recirculation again.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window. Besure to clear as much snow from the rear windowas possible.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonto turn the rear window defogger on or off.

An indicator light to the right of the button willcome on to show that the rear window defogger ison. The instrument panel brightness controlmay have to be adjusted to the highest settingduring the daytime in order to see the indicatorlight.

The rear window defogger will turn off about20 minutes after the button is pressed. If the buttonis pressed again, it will run another 20 minutes.The defogger can be turned off by pressingthe button again or by turning off the engine.

Do not drive the vehicle until all windows are clear.

z (Heated Seats): Press this button to turnthe heated seats on and off. The button on the leftcontrols the driver’s seat and the button on theright controls the passenger’s seat. See HeatedSeats on page 10 for additional information.

161

Dual Automatic Climate ControlSystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Turn both the fan and modeknob to AUTO for automatic control of the insidetemperature, the air delivery mode and the fanspeed. You may notice a delay of two tothree minutes before the fan comes on when theautomatic operation is used in cold weather.

For the automatic system to function, thetemperature must be set between 60°F (15°C) and90°F (32°C).

1. Adjust the temperature to a comfortablesetting.

2. Press the PASS button to turn the passengerclimate control system on and off. When thepassenger system is off, the driver’stemperature setting is also used for thepassenger and the passenger display is off.In cold weather, the system will start at reducedfan speeds to avoid blowing cold air into yourvehicle until warmer air is available. The systemwill start out blowing air at the floor but maychange modes automatically as the vehiclewarms up to maintain the chosen temperaturesetting. The length of time needed for the air towarm up will depend on the outsidetemperature and the length of time that haselapsed since your vehicle was last driven.

3. Wait for the system to regulate. This may takefrom 10 to 30 minutes. Then adjust thetemperature, if necessary.

162

Do not cover the solar sensor located in thecenter of the instrument panel, near thewindshield. For more information on the solarsensor, see “Sensors” later in this section.

Manual Operation

x w (Temperature): To manually adjust thetemperature inside the vehicle, press the up arrowon the temperature control to raise the temperatureand press the down arrow to lower thetemperature. The display will show your selection.

When one temperature is displayed, the drivertemperature is set. When both temperatures aredisplayed, the temperature for both the driverand passenger are set. Pressing PASS will turnthe passenger temperature setting on andoff. If only the driver temperature is set, the drivertemperature is used for the passenger and thepassenger display is off.

9 (Fan): Turn the fan knob clockwise to increasethe fan speed and counterclockwise to decreasethe fan speed. Turning the fan knob cancelsthe automatic fan operation and places the system

in manual. Turn the knob to AUTO to return toautomatic fan operation. If the airflow seems lowwhen the fan is at the highest setting, thepassenger compartment air filter, if equipped, mayneed to be replaced. See Passenger CompartmentAir Filter on page 166 for additional information.

9 (Off): Turning the fan knob off will turnthe controller completely off.

Mode: This control has several settings to controlthe direction of airflow.

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

AUTO: This mode is automatically set dependingon the temperature in the vehicle and solarsensor information.

H (Vent): This mode directs air to theinstrument panel outlets.

% (Bi-Level): This mode directs airflow to theinstrument panel outlets and to the floor outlets.A small amount of air is also directed to thewindshield and the side window outlets.

163

6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air tothe floor outlets with some air directed to theside window outlets, and a little air directed to thewindshield.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning compressor on or off. Theindicator light on the button will come on when theair conditioning is on.

? (Recirculation): Press this button to turnthe recirculation mode on or off. This mode keepsoutside air from coming in the vehicle. It can beused to help reduce the outside air and odors thatmay enter the vehicle or help to cool the airinside the vehicle quicker.

Recirculation is not available in defrost orfloor/defog mode. Pressing the recirculation buttonwill turn on the indicator light.

Using recirculation for long periods of time maycause the air inside your vehicle to becometoo dry. To prevent this from happening, after theair in your vehicle has cooled, turn therecirculation mode off.

z (Heated Seats): Press this button to turn theheated seats on and off. The button on the leftcontrols the driver’s seat and the button onthe right controls the passenger’s seat. SeeHeated Seats on page 10 for additionalinformation.

SensorsThe solar sensor on your vehicle monitors thesolar radiation and the air inside of your vehicle,then uses the information to maintain the selectedtemperature by initiating needed adjustments tothe temperature, the fan speed and the air deliverysystem. The system may also supply cooler airto the side of the vehicle facing the sun. Therecirculation mode will also be activated, asnecessary. Do not cover the solar sensor locatedin the center of the instrument panel, near thewindshield, or the system will not work properly.

164

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to clear fog or frost from yourwindshield. Use the floor/defog mode to clear thewindows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fogor frost from the windshield more quickly.

- (Floor/Defog): This mode directs the airbetween the windshield, floor outlets and sidewindows. When you select this mode, the systemturns off recirculation and runs the air-conditioningcompressor unless the outside temperature is nearor below freezing. Pressing the recirculation button,while in this mode, will have no effect other thanturning on the indicator light.

1 (Defrost): This mode directs most of the air tothe windshield, with some air directed to the sidewindows. In this mode, the system willautomatically turn off the recirculation and run theair conditioning compressor, unless the outsidetemperature is near or below freezing. Pressing therecirculation button, while in this mode, will have noaffect other than turning on the indicator light.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

The rear window defogger will only work when theengine is running.

= (Rear Window Defogger): Press this buttonto turn the rear window defogger on and off. Besure to clear as much snow from the rear windowas possible.

The rear window defogger will turn off about20 minutes after the button is pressed. If turnedon again, the defogger will only run for about20 minutes before turning off. The defogger canalso be turned off by pressing the button again orby turning off the engine.

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows areclear.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and the repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notattach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decalor anything similar to the defogger grid.

165

Outlet AdjustmentTurn the air outlets, located in the middle and ateach outboard side of the instrument panel,to adjust the direction of the airflow.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into the vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of thesystem.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at thehighest setting, the passenger compartmentair filter may need to be replaced. See“Passenger Compartment Air Filter” following,for more information.

Passenger Compartment Air FilterThe passenger compartment air filter is locatednear the passenger’s side windshield wiperarm, under the inlet grille.

The filter traps most of the pollen from enteringthe climate control system. Similar to the engine’sair filter, it may need to be changed periodicallyto insure system performance. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 473 for more information.

To change the passenger compartment airfilter, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition to ACC and the windshieldwipers on.

2. Turn the ignition to OFF when the windshieldwipers are in the upright position.

3. Raise the hood.

4. Disconnect the windshield washer pump hosefrom the fender rail and the air inlet grille.

5. Remove the hood weather-strip from thepassenger’s side of the vehicle, peeling itback halfway.

166

6. Remove the two air inlet grille retainers usinga flat tool to first pry up on the center postand then the remainder of the fastener can bepulled out.

7. Remove the air inlet grille by sliding it down todisengage the two tabs that hold it to thebottom of the windshield glass. Place the grilleon the windshield while you remove thefilter. Do not try to remove the grille from thevehicle because it is still attached on theright side of the vehicle by a fastener.

8. Remove the water deflector.

9. Remove the passenger compartment air filterby pulling on the tab.

10. Install a new passenger compartment air filter.Make sure it slides under the compartmentretainers. Be sure the long rubber waterdeflector above the filter stays in place.

11. Reverse steps 1 through 8.

167

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on the vehicle. The pictures helpto locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to the warning lightsand gages could also save you or others frominjury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Asthe details show on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when the engine isstarted just to indicate they are working. If youare familiar with this section, you should notbe alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together toindicate when there is a problem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on while the vehicle is being driven, or whenone of the gages shows there may be a problem,check the section that tells you what to doabout it. Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly – and even dangerous.So please get to know the vehicle’s warning lightsand gages. They can be a big help.

The vehicle also has a Driver InformationCenter (DIC) that works along with the warninglights and gages. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 186 for more information.

168

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel cluster is designed to show at a glance how the vehicle is running. It will show howfast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel is in the fuel tank, and many other things needed todrive the vehicle safely and economically.

United States version shown, Canada similar

169

The vehicle is equipped with this cluster or onevery similar to it. It has indicator warning lights thatare explained on the following pages. Be sure toread about them.

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometers perhour (km/h). The odometer, located on the DriverInformation Center (DIC) display, shows howfar the vehicle has been driven, in either miles orkilometers. See DIC Controls and Displays(Base Level DIC) on page 186 or DIC Controlsand Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) onpage 190 for more information.

If the vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD) thespeed will also be displayed on the HUD screen.

If a vehicle has to have a new odometer installed,a new one can be set to the mileage total ofthe old odometer, if that can be done. If it cannot,than it will be set at zero and a label must beput on the driver’s door to show the old mileagereading when the new odometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer, located in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), tells how far the vehicle hasdriven since it was last reset. The miles(kilometers) for two different trips can be viewed.See DIC Controls and Displays (Base LevelDIC) on page 186 or DIC Controls and Displays(Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) on page 190 formore information on setting the trip odometer.

170

Tachometer

The tachometer displaysthe engine speed inrevolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, yourvehicle could be damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to RUN or START, achime will sound for several seconds to remindyou and your passengers to buckle yoursafety belts. The driver safety belt light will alsocome on and stay on for several seconds, then itwill flash for several more. You should buckleyour seat belt.

If the driver’s belt isbuckled, neither thechime nor the light willcome on.

171

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to RUN orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 74 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

If the passenger’s safetybelt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor thelight will come on.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel cluster, which shows the airbagsymbol. The system checks the airbag’selectrical system for malfunctions. The lightindicates if there is an electrical problem. Thesystem check includes the airbag sensors,the airbag modules, the wiring, and the diagnosticmodule. For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System on page 64.

This light will come onwhen the vehicle isstarted, and it will flashfor a few seconds. Thenthe light should go out.

This means the system is functioning properly.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after thevehicle is started, or comes on as the vehicle isbeing driven, the airbag system may not workproperly. Have the vehicle serviced right away.

172

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

The airbag readiness light should flash for afew seconds when the ignition key is turned toRUN. If the light does not come on then, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn you if there isa problem.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.The vehicle’s instrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. If you useremote start to start your vehicle from a distance,if your vehicle has this feature, you may notsee the system check. Then, after several moreseconds, the status indicator will light either ON orOFF, or either the on or off symbol to let youknow the status of the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag.


173

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag.A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.


{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag if the systemdetects a rear-facing child restraint, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

174

If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 74 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 172.

Up-Shift Light

If your vehicle has thislight, it will come onwhen the shift lever is inthe manual transaxleposition.

It will appear as a prompt to up-shift to the nextgear using one of the Tap-Shift® paddles locatedon the steering wheel.

If your vehicle has the Head-Up Display (HUD), itwill only appear on it.

See Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 110and Head-Up Display (HUD) on page 151 formore information.

175

Brake System Warning LightThe vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop the vehicle. Forgood braking, though, both parts should beworking well.

This light should come on briefly when the ignitionkey is turned to RUN. If it does not come onthen, have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when the parking brakeis set. The light will stay on if the parkingbrake does not release fully. If it stays on after theparking brake is fully released, it means thevehicle has a brake problem.

The PARKING BRAKE ON message will alsoappear in the Driver Information Center (DIC)when the parking brake is set and the vehicle isgoing faster than 5 mph. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 200 for more information.

The brake warning light may also come onwhen the brake fluid is low. If this occurs, theLOW BRAKE FLUID message will also appear inthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See DICWarnings and Messages on page 200 for moreinformation.

If the brake warning light comes on while thevehicle is being driven, pull off the road and stopcarefully. The brake pedal may be harder topush, or it may go closer to the floor. It may alsotake the vehicle longer to stop. If the light isstill on, have the vehicle towed for service. SeeTowing Your Vehicle on page 322.


176

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

If the vehicle has theAnti-lock Brake System(ABS), this light willcome on when theengine is started andmay stay on for severalseconds. That is normal.

If the ABS warning light comes on and stays on,there may be a problem with the anti-lockportion of the brake system. If the brake systemwarning light is not on, the vehicle still has brakes,but it does not have anti-lock brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 176.

If the light stays on, the vehicle needs service.If the light comes on while the vehicle is beingdriven, stop as soon as possible and turn theignition off. Then start the vehicle again to reset thesystem. If the light still stays on, or comes on againwhile driving, the vehicle needs service. If theregular brake system warning light is not on, thevehicle still has brakes, but it does not haveanti-lock brakes. If the brake system warning light isalso on, the vehicle does not have anti-lock brakesand there is a problem with the regular brakes. SeeBrake System Warning Light on page 176. If boththe brake system warning light and the anti-lockbrake system light is on, pull off the road and havethe vehicle towed for service.

The anti-lock brake system warning light will comeon briefly when the ignition key is turned toRUN. This is normal. If the light does not come onthen, have it fixed so it will be ready to warnyou if there is a problem.

177

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light should comeon briefly as you startthe engine.

This light will also come on when one or more ofyour tires is significantly under-inflated. Stop andcheck your tires as soon as it is safe to do so.If underinflated, inflate them to the proper pressure.See Tires on page 400 for more information. Thislight will flash for 60 seconds and then turn on solidif a problem is detected with the Tire PressureMonitor System. See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 409 for more information.

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

If the vehicle has theTraction ControlSystem (TCS), this lightmay come on for thefollowing reasons:

• The traction control button, located on thecenter console, is pressed, turning thesystem off. The light will stay on. To turn thesystem back on, press the button againand the warning light should go out. SeeTraction Control System (TCS) on page 292for more information.

• If there is a brake system problem that isspecifically related to traction control, the TCSwill turn off and the warning light will come on.

• If the brakes begin to overheat, the TCS willturn off and the warning light will come on untilthe brakes cool down.

If the TCS warning light comes on and stays onfor an extended period of time when the system isturned on, the vehicle needs service.

178

Enhanced Traction SystemWarning Light

If the vehicle has theEnhanced TractionSystem (ETS), this lightmay come on for thefollowing reasons:

• If the traction control button located on thecenter console is pressed, turning the systemoff. This light will come on and stay on. To turnthe system back on, press the button again andthe warning light should turn off. See EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 293.

• If the system is affected by an engine-relatedproblem, the system will turn off and thewarning light will come on.

If the light comes on and stays on for an extendedperiod of time when the system is turned on,the vehicle needs service.

Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light

This light indicates thatthe engine coolant hasoverheated or theradiator cooling fan isnot working.

If the vehicle has been operating under normaldriving conditions, pull off the road, stop thevehicle, and turn off the engine as soon aspossible.

See Cooling System on page 366 for moreinformation.

179

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

The vehicle has a gagethat shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the gage pointer moves into the shaded area,the engine is too hot. That reading meansthe engine coolant has overheated. If you havebeen operating the vehicle under normaldriving conditions, you should pull off the road,stop the vehicle, and turn off the engine as soonas possible.

See Cooling System on page 366 for moreinformation.

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

180

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, your emissioncontrols may not work as well, your fueleconomy may not be as good, and your enginemay not run as smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that may not be covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 336.

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

181

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon as it ispossible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 342.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

182

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 338. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

183

Oil Pressure Light

If there is a problemwith the vehicle’s oilpressure, this light maystay on when theengine is started.

It may also come on while the vehicle is beingdriven. This indicates that the engine could be lowon oil or could have some other oil problem.Have it fixed right away.

The oil light could also come on in two othersituations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test toindicate it is working. The light will go out whenthe ignition is turned to RUN. If it does not comeon while the ignition is in the on position, theremay be a problem with the fuse or bulb. SeeFuses and Circuit Breakers on page 460.

• If the brakes are applied quickly and the vehiclemakes a hard stop, the light may come on for amoment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

184

Fog Lamp Light

This light will come onwhen the fog lamps arein use.

The light will go out when the fog lamps areturned off. See Fog Lamps on page 146 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set yourcruise control.

The light will go out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 140for more information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhenever thehigh-beam headlampsare on.

See “Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer” underExterior Lamps on page 144 for additionalinformation.

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage showsabout how much fuel isleft in the fuel tankwhen the ignition is on.

185

When the indicator nears empty, there is still alittle fuel left, but you should get more soon.

Here are four things owners usually ask about thefuel gage. All these situations are normal anddo not indicate a problem with the fuel gage:

• At the gas station the pump shuts off beforethe gage reads full.

• It takes more or less fuel to fill up than thegage indicates. For example, the gagereads half full, but it took more or less thanhalf the tank’s capacity to fill it.

• The gage pointer may move while cornering,braking or speeding up.

• The gage may not indicate full when theignition is turned off.

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) givesimportant safety and maintenance facts. When thevehicle’s ignition is turned on, all of the DIClights illuminate for a few seconds and anintroductory message will appear. After this, theDIC will begin working.

DIC Controls and Displays(Base Level DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) controlbuttons and the message display screen arelocated above the radio. The DIC gives importantsafety and maintenance facts concerning thevehicle. The status of many of the vehicle’ssystems along with driver personal programmingmode menus and warning messages aboutthe vehicle’s systems may display on the DICscreen.

The vehicle’s transaxle position will also appear.

The buttons on the base level are trip odometer,set/reset, and options.

186

Trip Odometer

3 (Trip Odometer): Press this button to accessthe odometer and trip distance modes.

The first menu on the DIC screen will be theodometer reading, or cumulative mileage of thevehicle. The odometer cannot be reset.

Press the trip odometer button to advance to thenext menu.

Trip Distances: This menu shows the distancesthat the vehicle has driven between specificpoints. The trip odometer will record the number ofmiles up to 9,999.9 miles or 9 999.9 km travelledfor up to two trips. When 9,999.9 miles or9 999.9 km is reached for either trip, the odometerfor that trip will go back to zero.

Press the trip odometer button again to accessTRIP A. Press the trip odometer button againto access TRIP B. To reset the trip odometer(s)back to zero miles or kilometers, access the trip toreset and press the set/reset button.

The trip odometer has a feature called theretro-active reset. This can be used to set the tripodometer to the number of miles or kilometersdriven since the ignition was last turned on. Thiscan be used if the trip odometer was not resetat the beginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press andhold the set/reset button for at least three seconds.The trip odometer will display the number ofmiles or kilometers driven since the ignition waslast turned on and the vehicle began moving. Oncethe vehicle has begun moving, the trip odometerwill accumulate mileage. For example, if thevehicle was driven 5.0 miles (8.0 km) before thevehicle is started again, and then the retro-activereset feature is activated, the display will show5.0 miles (8.0 km). As the vehicle begins moving,the display will increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature is activated afterthe vehicle is started, but before it begins moving,the display will show the number of miles orkilometers that were driven during the last ignitioncycle.

Press the trip odometer button again to access theodometer.

187

Set/Reset

r (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reseta menu item when using the trip odometer oroptions buttons.

Options

4 (Options): Press this button to access the Date,Language, Display Units, Daytime DisplayEnhancement, Engine Oil Monitor System,Personal Programming modes, and Tire Pressurereadings.

Date: This menu sets the date.

The time is set through the radio. See Setting theTime on page 234 for more information.

To set the date, use the following procedure:

1. Press the options button until the dateis displayed on the DIC.

2. Press the set/reset button to access theRESET YEAR screen. The second position inthe year will be selected. Press and holdthe set/reset button to scroll through theavailable digits. Release the button when thecorrect digit appears.

3. Press the options button to advance to thefirst position in the year. Press and hold theset/reset button to scroll through the availabledigits. Release the button when the correctdigit appears.

4. Press the options button to advance to themonths of the year.

5. Press the set/reset button to scroll through themonths of the year, releasing the button whenthe correct month appears.

6. Press the options button to advance to thedays of the month.

7. Press the set/reset button to scroll through thedays of the month, releasing the button whenthe correct day appears.

8. Press the options button again to advance tothe main date screen. The screen will nowdisplay the new date.

Language: This menu allows the selection of thelanguage in which the DIC messages willappear. The DIC can be programmed to one ofthree languages: English, French, or Spanish. Themessage on the HUD, if equipped, will alsoappear in the language selected. See Head-UpDisplay (HUD) on page 151.

188

To change the language, use the followingprocedure:

1. Press the options button to enter the languagescreen.

2. Press the set/reset button to scroll throughand set the language choice.

3. Press the options button again to advance tothe next screen.

DISPLAY UNITS: This menu allows selection ofmeasurements to be displayed in English ormetric units. The messages on the HUD, ifequipped, and the instrument panel cluster willalso appear with the type of measurementselected.

To set the measurement when Display Units isshown, use the following procedure:

1. Press the set/reset button to select ENGLISHor METRIC.


DAYTIME DISPLAY ENHANCEMENT: Thismenu allows selection of the color of the displaymessage. When ON is selected for the daytimeenhancement, the messages will appear black ona red screen. This combination makes it easierto see the DIC messages during the daytime.When OFF is selected, or when the headlampsare on, the messages will appear red on ablack background.

To set the daytime display enhancement, use thefollowing procedure:

1. Press the set/reset button to select OFF or ON.


ENGINE OIL MONITOR SYSTEM: This menuallows the engine oil monitor system to be reset.To reset the engine oil monitor system, seeEngine Oil Life System on page 353.

PERSONAL PROGRAMMING MODE: This menuallows you to customize several features onyour vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 226 for more information.

Press the options button again to advance to thenext screen.

189

TIRE PRESSURE: This menu shows the tirepressure for each tire. The tire pressure will beshown in either pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa). Press the options button untilthe DIC shows the tire pressure for the fronttires. Press the options button again to view thepressure for the rear tires.

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detectedby the system while driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 408 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 200 for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashesinstead of a value, there may be a problem withyour vehicle. If this consistently occurs, seeyou dealer for service.

DISPLAY OFF will appear on the next screen.The screen will count down and then go blank.Press the options button to advance to a newscreen.

Press the options button to return to the main(date) screen.

DIC Controls and Displays(Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer)The Driver Information Center (DIC) controlbuttons and the message display screen arelocated above the radio. The DIC gives importantsafety and maintenance facts concerning thevehicle. The status of many of the vehicle’ssystems along with driver personalization menusand warning messages about the vehicle’ssystems may display on the DIC screen.

The outside temperature automatically appears onthe bottom right corner of the DIC display screen.If the outside temperature is below 38°F (3°C), thetemperature reading will toggle between displayingthe outside temperature and the word ICE fortwo minutes. If there is a problem with the systemthat controls the temperature display, the letters OC(Open Circuit) or SC (Short Circuit) will appear onthe display. If this occurs, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer.

The vehicle’s transaxle position and the directionthe vehicle is traveling will also appear on theDIC screen.

190

The compass is self-calibrating, which eliminatesthe need to manually set the compass. However,under certain circumstances, such as during a longdistance cross-country trip, it will be necessaryto compensate for compass variance and reset thezone through the DIC. See DIC Compass(Uplevel DIC) on page 198 for more information.

The buttons on the DIC trip computer are gages,trip odometer, set/reset, options, and fuel.

Gages

2 (Gages): Press this button to access the OILLIFE REMAINING, TRANSMISSION FLUIDTEMPERATURE, BATTERY, ENGINE HOURS,ENGINE BOOST, and MAXIMUM Gs modes.

OIL LIFE REMAINING: Press the gages buttonuntil OIL LIFE REMAINING is displayed. Thisscreen indicates the percentage of oil life in the

vehicle’s engine that has not degraded. SeeEngine Oil on page 350 for more information.

After the oil has been changed in the vehicle, resetthe ENGINE OIL MONITOR screen in theoptions menu. To reset the engine oil monitorsystem, see Engine Oil Life System on page 353.

Press the gages button again to advance tothe next screen.

TRANSMISSION FLUID TEMP: This screendisplays this message along with the temperature(F° or C°) of the transmission fluid.

Press the gages button again to advance to thenext screen.

BATTERY: This screen displays the amount ofvolts the battery is generating.

Your vehicle’s charging system regulates voltagebased on the state of the battery. The batteryvoltage may fluctuate when viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This is normal.

See Electric Power Management on page 150 formore information.


191

ENGINE HOURS: This screen shows the numberof cumulative hours the engine has operatedwhile the key was in the RUN position. This screencannot be reset.

Press the gages button to advance to the nextscreen.

ENGINE BOOST: If the vehicle has thesupercharged engine, this screen will appear.It shows a graphic that indicates the amount ofboost the engine is receiving.


MAXIMUM Gs: If you have the GXP option, thisscreen will appear. The DIC monitors andkeeps track of the maximum levels foracceleration, deceleration, and lateral-accelerationachieved since the screen was last reset. If youtry to select this screen while the vehicle ismoving, the message MAXIMUM Gs NOTAVAILABLE WHILE MOVING will display. To viewthe maximum accelerations achieved since lastreset, you must bring the vehicle to a stop.Then the values will be displayed.

To reset the values to zero, press and hold theset/reset button.


Trip Odometer

3 (Trip Odometer): Press this button to accessthe Odometer, Trip Distances, AVERAGESPEED, and TIME ELAPSED modes.

Odometer: When the trip odometer button ispressed, the first menu displayed on the DICscreen is the odometer reading, or cumulativemileage of the vehicle. The odometer cannot bereset.

Press the trip odometer button again to advanceto the next menu.

Trip Distances: This menu shows the distancesthat the vehicle has driven between specificpoints. The trip odometer will record the number ofmiles up to 9,999.9 miles or 9 999.9 km travelledfor up to two trips. When 9,999.9 miles or9 999.9 km is reached for either trip, the odometerfor that trip will go back to zero.

192

To reset the trip distances, use the followingprocedures:

1. Press the trip odometer button again toaccess TRIP A. Press the trip odometer buttonagain to access TRIP B. To reset the tripodometer(s) back to zero miles or tozero kilometers, access the trip that needs tobe reset and press the set/reset button.

2. Press the trip odometer button again toadvance to the next screen.

The trip odometer has a feature called theretro-active reset. This can be used to set the tripodometer to the number of miles (kilometers)driven since the ignition was last turned on. Thiscan be used if the trip odometer is not reset at thebeginning of the trip.

To use the retro-active reset feature, press andhold the set/reset button for at least three seconds.The trip odometer will display the number ofmiles or kilometers driven since the ignition waslast turned on and the vehicle was moving.Once the vehicle begins moving, the trip odometerwill accumulate mileage. For example, if thevehicle was driven 5.0 miles (8.0 km) before it isstarted again, and then the retro-active resetfeature is activated, the display will show 5.0 miles(8.0 km). As the vehicle begins moving, thedisplay will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc.

If the retro-active reset feature is activated after thevehicle is started, but before it begins moving, thedisplay will show the number of miles or kilometersthat were driven during the last ignition cycle.

193

AVERAGE SPEED: The average speed isdisplayed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometersper hour (km/h). The average speed is calculatedfrom the various vehicle speeds recorded sincethe last reset of this menu item. To reset theaverage speed, press the set/reset button. Thedisplay will return to zero.

Press the trip odometer button again to advanceto the next screen.

TIME ELAPSED: This screen can be used as astopwatch. The display can show the hours,minutes and seconds. The elapsed time indicatorwill record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes and59 seconds, then it will reset to zero and continuecounting.

To set the time elapsed function, use the followingprocedures:

1. Press the set/reset button for less thantwo seconds to start or stop the timer.

2. Press and hold the set/reset button formore than two seconds to reset the timer backto zero.

Press the trip odometer button again to advanceto the next screen.

Set/Reset

r (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reseta mode item when using the trip odometer oroption buttons.

Options

4 (Options): Press this button to access the Date,Language, Display Units, Daytime DisplayEnhancement, Engine Oil Monitor System,Compass Calibration, Personal Programmingmodes, and Tire Pressure readings.

Date: This menu sets the date.

The time is set through the radio. See Setting theTime on page 234 for more information.

To set the date, use the following procedure:

1. Press the options button until the dateis displayed on the DIC.

2. Press the set/reset button to access theRESET YEAR screen. The second position inthe year will be selected. Press and holdthe set/reset button to scroll through theavailable digits. Release the button when thecorrect digit appears.

194

3. Press the options button to advance to thefirst position in the year. Press and hold theset/reset button to scroll through the availabledigits. Release the button when the correctdigit appears.

4. Press the options button to advance to themonths of the year.

5. Press the set/reset button to scroll through themonths of the year, releasing the button whenthe correct month appears.

6. Press the options button to advance to thedays of the month.

7. Press the set/reset button to scroll through thedays of the month, releasing the button whenthe correct day appears.

8. Press the options button again to advance tothe main date screen. The screen will nowdisplay the new date.

9. Press the options button to advance to thenext screen.

Language: This menu allows selection ofthe language in which the DIC messages willappear. The DIC can be programmed in one ofthree languages: English, French, or Spanish. Themessage on the HUD, if equipped, will alsoappear in the language selected. See Head-UpDisplay (HUD) on page 151.

To change the language, use the followingprocedure:

1. Press the options button to enter the languagescreen.

2. Press the set/reset button to scroll throughand set the language choice.


DISPLAY UNITS: This menu allows selection ofmeasurements to be displayed in English ormetric units. The messages on the HUD, ifequipped, and the instrument panel cluster willalso appear in the type of measurement selected.

195

To set the display units function, use the followingprocedure:

1. Press the set/reset button to select ENGLISHor METRIC.


DAYTIME DISPLAY ENHANCEMENT: Thismenu allows selection of the color of the displaymessage. When ON is selected for the daytimeenhancement, the messages will appear black ona red screen. This combination makes it easierto see the DIC messages during the daytime.When OFF is selected, or when the headlampsare on, the messages will appear red on ablack background.

To set the daytime display enhancement function,use the following procedure:

1. Press the set/reset button to select OFF or ON.


ENGINE OIL MONITOR SYSTEM: This menuallows the engine oil monitor system to be reset.To reset the engine oil monitor system, seeEngine Oil Life System on page 353.

Press the options button to advance to the nextscreen.

COMPASS CALIBRATION MODE: This menuallows you to adjust for compass variance.See DIC Compass (Uplevel DIC) on page 198 formore information.


PERSONAL PROGRAMMING MODE: This menuallows you to customize several features onyour vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization onpage 226 for more information.


196

TIRE PRESSURE: This menu shows the tirepressure for each tire. The tire pressure will beshown in either pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa). Press the options button untilthe DIC shows the tire pressure for the fronttires. Press the options button again to view thepressure for the rear tires.

If a low or high tire pressure condition is detectedby the system while driving, a message advisingyou to check the pressure in a specific tirewill appear in the display. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 408 and DIC Warningsand Messages on page 200 for more information.

If the tire pressure display shows dashesinstead of a value, there may be a problem withyour vehicle. If this consistently occurs, seeyou dealer for service.

Press the options button to advance to the nextscreen.

DISPLAY OFF will appear on the next screen. Thescreen will count down and then go blank.

Press the options button to return to the main(date) screen.

Fuel

. (Fuel): Press this button to access theAverage Fuel Economy, Instantaneous FuelEconomy, and Fuel Range modes.

AVG ECONOMY (Average Fuel Economy): Thisscreen will display the approximate averagemiles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km). This number is calculated basedon the number of mpg (L/100 km) recorded sincethe last time this menu item was reset.

To reset the average fuel economy for the vehicle,follow this procedure:

1. Press the set/reset button to reset to zero.

2. Press the fuel button again to advance to thenext screen.

INST ECONOMY (Instantaneous FuelEconomy): This screen displays the current fueleconomy at a particular moment and willchange frequently as driving conditions change.Unlike average fuel economy, this screencannot be reset.

Press the fuel button again to advance to the nextscreen.

197

RANGE: This screen displays the approximatenumber of remaining miles or kilometers thevehicle can be driven without refueling. Thisestimate is based on the average fuel economyfor the amount of fuel remaining in the fueltank and the current driving conditions. Thisestimate will change if driving conditions change.For example, if driving in traffic and makingfrequent stops, the display may read one number,but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway thenumber may change even though the sameamount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is becausedifferent driving conditions produce differentfuel economies. Generally, freeway drivingproduces better fuel economy than city driving.

If the fuel tank contains less than 2 gallons (7.6 L),the LOW FUEL message will appear on the DICscreen. Fill the fuel tank as soon as possibleto avoid running out of fuel. See “Low Fuel” underDIC Warnings and Messages on page 200.

Press the fuel button again to advance to the nextscreen.

DIC Compass (Uplevel DIC)Your vehicle may have a compass in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

Setting the CompassThe compass is self-calibrating, which eliminatesthe need to manually set the compass.

However, under certain circumstances, such asduring a long distance cross-country trip, it will benecessary to compensate for compass varianceand reset the zone through the DIC.

Compass variance is the difference between theearth’s magnetic north and true geographicnorth. If not adjusted to account for compassvariance, the compass in the vehicle could givefalse readings.

In order to do this, the compass must be set orcalibrated to the variance zone in which the vehicleis traveling.

198

To adjust for compass variance, use the followingprocedure:

1. Find the vehicle’s current location andvariance zone number on the map.

2. Press the set/reset button to scroll throughand select the appropriate variance zone.

3. Press the options button to advance to thecalibration screen.

4. Drive the vehicle in a circle two times toactivate the compass.

The direction the vehicle is moving will bedisplayed in the bottom left corner of the screen,and will appear in the gages, fuel, trip, andsome of the options modes.

199

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages display if there is a problem inone of the vehicle’s systems. They overrideany other mode or screen the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) may be in.

Some messages can be cleared from the DICscreen. In order to do this, the message must beacknowledged. To acknowledge or clear themessage from the screen, press the set/resetbutton on the DIC. See DIC Controls and Displays(Base Level DIC) on page 186 or DIC Controlsand Displays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) onpage 190 for DIC button descriptions.

Other warning messages are not allowed to becleared until the problem indicated by the warningmessage is taken care of. When the problemindicated by the message is resolved, it can beacknowledged and the screen can be reset.

Be sure to take any message that appears on theDIC screen seriously and remember thatclearing the messages that are able to beacknowledged, will only make the messagedisappear, not correct the problem.

A/C OFF FOR ENGINE PROTECTIONThis message displays when the engine coolantbecomes hotter than the normal operatingtemperature. To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioning compressor isautomatically turned off. When the coolanttemperature returns to normal, the air conditioningcompressor turns back on. The vehicle canthen continue to be driven.

This message comes on while the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds for two seconds when thismessage is displayed. Press the set/resetbutton to acknowledge this warning message andto clear it from the screen.

This message continues to display forthree seconds if it has not been acknowledgedwhen the engine is turned off. It also re-displaysfor three seconds if the message has beenacknowledged, but the condition still exists whenthe engine is turned off.

If the condition still exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on.

200

AJAR

This symbol appearswith this message.

This message displays when a door or the trunk isnot closed properly. If your vehicle has theremote start feature, this message also displayswhen the hood is not closed properly. The graphichighlights the hood or trunk if either one is notclosed properly. The graphic indicates ahighlighted, open door to show which door ordoors are not closed properly. Make sure that thearea indicated is closed completely.

This message displays while the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds for two seconds when theignition is shifted out of PARK (P). Press theset/reset button to acknowledge this message andto clear it from the screen.



BATTERY SAVER ACTIVEThis message displays when the system detectsthat the battery voltage is dropping beyond areasonable level. The battery saver system startsreducing certain features of the vehicle whichyou may be able to notice. At the point that thefeatures are disabled, this message is displayed.It means that the vehicle is trying to save thecharge in the battery. Turn off all unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery to recharge. Thenormal battery voltage range is 11.5 to 15.5 volts.If your vehicle has the uplevel DIC, you canmonitor battery voltage on the DIC by pressing thegages button until BATTERY appears.

201

CHANGE OIL SOON

This symbol comes onwith this message.

This message displays when service is requiredfor the vehicle. See your dealer. See Engine Oil onpage 350 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 473 for more information.

The CHANGE OIL SOON message is reset byacknowledging the message. The ENGINE OILMONITOR SYSTEM screen under the optionsmenu on the DIC must also be reset. See “EngineOil Monitor System” in options under DIC Controlsand Displays (Base Level DIC) on page 186 or DICControls and Displays (Uplevel DIC with TripComputer) on page 190 for more information.

This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.Press the set/reset button to acknowledge thismessage and to clear it from the screen.



CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE


This message displays when there is a problemwith the generator and battery charging systems.Driving with this problem could drain the battery.Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stopand turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso. Have the electrical system checked by yourdealer as soon as possible.

202

This message displays while the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds for two seconds when thismessage is displayed. Press the set/resetbutton to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.

This message continues to display if it has notbeen acknowledged when the engine is turned off.It also re-displays for three seconds if themessage has been acknowledged, but thecondition still exists when the engine is turned off.

If the condition still exists, the messagere-appears when the engine is turned on.

CHECK GAS CAPThis message displays when the fuel cap is noton, or is not fully tightened. Check the fuel cap toensure it is on and properly tightened. Thediagnostic system can determine if the fuel caphas been left off or improperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate intothe atmosphere. A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turn this message off. SeeFilling the Tank on page 342 for more information.

This message displays while the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds for two seconds when thismessage is displayed and then the messagecontinues to display. Press the set/reset button toacknowledge this message and to clear it fromthe screen.



203

CHECK TIRE PRESSUREThis message displays when the tire pressure inone of the tires needs to be checked. Thismessage also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHTFRONT, LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicatewhich tire needs to be checked. You can receivemore than one tire pressure message at a time.To read the other messages that may havebeen sent at the same time, press the set/resetbutton. If a tire pressure message appears on theDIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tirepressures checked and set to those shown on theTire Loading Information label. See Tires onpage 400, Loading Your Vehicle on page 317, andInflation - Tire Pressure on page 408. The DICdisplay also shows the tire pressure values for thefront and rear tires by pressing the optionsbutton. See DIC Controls and Displays (BaseLevel DIC) on page 186 or DIC Controls andDisplays (Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer)on page 190. If the tire pressure is low, the lowtire pressure warning light comes on. See Low TirePressure Warning Light on page 178 for moreinformation.

This message displays while the ignition is inRUN. Press the set/reset button to acknowledgethis message and to clear it from the screen.

This message continues to display forthree seconds if it has not been acknowledgedwhen the engine is turned off. It also re-displays forthree seconds if the message has beenacknowledged, but the condition still exists whenthe engine is turned off.


CRUISE SET


204

This message and symbol display briefly wheneverthe cruise control is set. The cruise control lighton the instrument panel cluster also comeson when cruise control is set. See Cruise ControlLight on page 185. CRUISE SET also appearsbriefly in the Head-Up Display (HUD), if yourvehicle has this feature. This message displayswhen the ignition is in RUN. See Cruise Control onpage 140 for more information.

This message does not need to be acknowledged.

DELAYED LOCKINGThis message displays when the doors of thevehicle are closed and the delayed locking featurehas been programmed through the DIC. See“DELAYED LOCKING” under DIC VehicleCustomization on page 226 for more information.

This message displays when the ignition is inOFF. A chime sounds for two seconds when thismessage is displayed.

This message cannot be acknowledged.

HEADLAMPS SUGGESTEDThis message displays when the amount ofavailable light outside the vehicle is low and theexterior lamps control has been turned off. Thiscondition happens when the headlamps are turnedoff at night or the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)are turned off during the day. This message informsthe driver that it has become dark enough outsideto require the headlamps to be turned on. When theheadlamps are turned on, this message clears fromthe screen. See Exterior Lamps on page 144 andDaytime Running Lamps (DRL) on page 145 formore information.

This message displays while the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds for two seconds when thismessage is displayed. Press the set/resetbutton to acknowledge this warning message andto clear it from the screen.



205

HOT COOLANT

Notice: If the HOT COOLANT warning messageappears on the DIC display, stop the vehicle assoon as possible. Do not increase the enginespeed above normal idling speed. Severeengine damage can result from driving a vehiclewith an overheated engine. See EngineOverheating on page 364 for more information.


This message displays when the engine coolanttemperature is too hot. The engine coolanttemperature warning light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster. Also, the engine coolanttemperature gage will read in the red or hot area.See Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light onpage 179 and Engine Coolant Temperature Gageon page 180 for more information.

To avoid added strain, turn off the air conditioner if itis on. When the coolant temperature returns tonormal, the air conditioner can be turned back on.

This message displays only while the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds continuously when thismessage is displayed. Press the set/reset buttonto acknowledge this message and to clear itfrom the screen.



206

HOT ENGINE OIL. REDUCE SPEEDOn some vehicles, this message displays whenthe vehicle’s engine oil is above the proper engineoperating temperature. Reduce the speed of thevehicle. If this message continues to display, havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer as soon aspossible. A chime sounds continuously when thismessage is displayed. Press the set/resetbutton to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.


HOT TRANS FLUID


This message displays when the transaxle fluid inthe vehicle is too hot. Stop the vehicle andallow it to idle until it cools down. If this messagecontinues to display, have the vehicle servicedby your dealer as soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the Uplevel Trip Computer DIC,you can determine the actual temperature ofthe transaxle fluid using the vehicle’s gages button.See DIC Controls and Displays (Base LevelDIC) on page 186 or DIC Controls and Displays(Uplevel DIC with Trip Computer) on page 190 formore information.




207

KEY FOB BATTERY LOW


This message displays when the battery in theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter needs tobe replaced. To replace the battery, see “BatteryReplacement” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 87.


This message continues to display if it has notbeen acknowledged when the engine is turned off.It also re-displays for three seconds if themessage has been acknowledged, but thecondition still exists when the engine is turned off.The message re-appears when the engine isturned on and the condition still exists.

KEY IN IGNITIONThis message displays and a chime soundscontinuously when the driver exits the vehicle whilethe key is in the ignition after the engine isturned off.

This message cannot be acknowledged.This message disappears and the chiming stopswhen the key is removed from the ignition.

208

LEFT FRONT TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the left front turnsignal lamp needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,Turn Signal, and Stoplamps on page 395 forreplacement procedures.




LEFT REAR TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the left rear turnsignal lamp needs to be replaced. See Taillamps,Turn Signal, and Stoplamps on page 395 forreplacement procedures.




209

LOW BRAKE FLUID


This message displays when the brake fluid levelis low. Have the brake system serviced byyour dealer as soon as possible. See Brakes onpage 378.

The brake system warning light also appears onthe instrument panel cluster when this messageappears on the DIC. See Brake System WarningLight on page 176.

This message displays only while the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds for two seconds whilethis message is displayed. Press the set/resetbutton to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.


If the condition exists, the message re-appearswhen the engine is turned on.

210

LOW FUEL


This message displays when the vehicle is low onfuel. Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible.

This message displays while the ignition is in RUN.A chime sounds for two seconds when thismessage is displayed. Press the set/reset buttonto acknowledge this message and to clear itfrom the screen.



LOW OIL LEVEL


On some vehicles, this message displays when thevehicle’s engine oil is low. Fill the oil to the properlevel as soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 346 for engine oilfill location. Also, see Engine Oil on page 350 forinformation on the kind of oil to use and proper oillevel. If the vehicle has a supercharged engine, seeSupercharger Oil on page 355 for information onthe kind of oil to use and proper oil level.


211



LOW OIL PRESSURE

Notice: If the LOW OIL PRESSURE warningmessage appears on the DIC display, stop thevehicle immediately. Do not drive the vehicleuntil the cause of the low oil pressure iscorrected. Severe engine damage can resultfrom driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. SeeEngine Oil on page 350 for more information.


This message displays when the vehicle’s engineoil pressure is low. The low oil pressure warninglight also appears on the instrument panel cluster.See Oil Pressure Light on page 184.

Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damagecan result from driving a vehicle with low oilpressure. Have the vehicle serviced by your dealeras soon as possible when this warning messageis displayed.

This message displays only while the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds continuously when thismessage is displayed. Press the set/reset buttonto acknowledge this message and to clear itfrom the screen.



212

LOW WASHER FLUID


This message displays when the windshieldwasher fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluidreservoir as soon as possible. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 346 for locationof the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Also,see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 377for more information.

This message displays only while the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds for two seconds whenthis message is displayed. Press the set/resetbutton to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.



PARKING BRAKE ON


This message displays to alert the driver when thevehicle’s parking brake is on, the ignition is inRUN, and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph(8 km/h). See Parking Brake on page 115 formore information.

The brake system warning light also appears onthe instrument panel cluster when this messageappears on the DIC. See Brake System WarningLight on page 176.

213

A chime sounds continuously while this messageis displayed if driving above 5 mph (8 km/h).Press the set/reset button to acknowledge thismessage and to clear it from the screen.

This message continues to display forthree seconds if it has not been acknowledgedwhen the engine is turned off. It also re-displays forthree seconds if the message has beenacknowledged, but the condition still exists whenthe engine is turned off.


PARK LAMPS ONThis message displays to alert the driver when theparking lamps are on, the ignition is in OFF,and the key is removed. A chime soundscontinuously while this message is displayed. Thismessage cannot be acknowledged.

REDUCED ENGINE POWER


This message displays when the vehicle’s enginepower is reduced. If this happens during drivingconditions, such as climbing a steep hill, thetransaxle may overwork in a gear that may causedamage to the vehicle’s engine or transaxle.Reduced engine power can affect the vehicle’sability to accelerate. If this message is on,but there is no reduction in performance, proceedto your destination. The performance may bereduced the next time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reduced speedwhile this message is on, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should be taken to yourdealer for service as soon as possible.

214

This message displays only when the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds for two seconds whilethis message is displayed. Press the set/resetbutton to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.



REMOTE START ACTIVE PRESSHAZARD SWITCH TO CANCELIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays when a remote start is initiated.If you would like to cancel the remote start, turnon the hazard warning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 134.

REMOTE START DISABLEDIf your vehicle has the remote start feature, thismessage displays if a remote start attempt isunsuccessful. This may be caused if any of thefollowing conditions are true when a remotestart attempt is made:• The remote start system is disabled through

the DIC.• The key is in the ignition.• The hood or the doors are not closed.• There is an emission control system

malfunction.• The engine coolant temperature is too high.• The oil pressure is low.

• The hazard warning flashers are turned on.• The maximum number of remote starts

or remote start attempts between ignitioncycles has been reached.

• The content theft-deterrent alarm is on whileattempting to remote start the vehicle.

See “REMOTE START” under DIC VehicleCustomization on page 226 and “Remote VehicleStart” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 87 for more information.

215

RIGHT FRONT TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the vehicle’s rightfront turn signal needs to be replaced. See FrontTurn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps onpage 394 for bulb replacement procedures.




RIGHT REAR TURN LAMP OUTThis message displays when the vehicle’s rightrear turn signal needs to be replaced. SeeTaillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps onpage 395 for bulb replacement procedures.




216

SERVICE ABS SYSTEM


If the vehicle has the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS),this message displays when the vehicle’s brakesare not functioning properly. Have the brake systemserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.




SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM


This message displays when the vehicle’s brakesare not functioning properly. Have the brakesystem serviced by your dealer as soon aspossible.




217

SERVICE BRAKE APPLY SENSORThis message displays when the brake applysensor is not functioning properly. The vehicle stillhas brakes when this warning message displays,but you should have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer as soon as possible.




SERVICE PARK LAMPSThis message displays if one of the vehicle’sparking lamps needs to be replaced. See FrontTurn Signal, Parking and Fog Lamps on page 394for bulb replacement procedures.




218

SERVICE STABILITY SYSTEM


If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak® Plus system,this message displays when it is not functioningproperly. A warning light also appears on theinstrument panel cluster. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Warning Light on page 178or Enhanced Traction System Warning Light onpage 179. See StabiliTrak® Plus System onpage 295 for more information. Have theStabiliTrak® Plus system serviced by your dealeras soon as possible.




219

SERVICE THEFT SYSTEMThis message displays if there is a problem withthe theft-deterrent system programmed in the key.A fault has been detected in the system whichmeans that the system is disabled and it isnot protecting the vehicle. The vehicle usuallyrestarts; however, you may want to take thevehicle to your dealer before turning off the engine.See Keys on page 84 for information on thePASS-Key® III system.




SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMThis message displays if a part on the TirePressure Monitor (TPM) system is not workingproperly. If you drive your vehicle while any of thefour sensors are missing or inoperable, thewarning comes on in about 20 minutes. A sensorwould be missing, for example, if you putdifferent wheels on your vehicle withouttransferring the sensors. If the warning comes onand stays on, there may be a problem with theTPM. See your dealer.

This message displays only while the ignition is inRUN. Press the set/reset button to acknowledgethis message and to clear it from the screen.

This message continues to display if it hasnot been acknowledged when the engine is turnedoff. It also re-displays for three seconds if themessage has been acknowledged, but thecondition still exists when the engine is turned off.


220

SERVICE TRACTION SYSTEM


If the vehicle has the Traction ControlSystem (TCS), this message displays when thesystem is not functioning properly. A warning lightalso appears on the instrument panel cluster.See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Lighton page 178 or Enhanced Traction SystemWarning Light on page 179. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 292 for more information.Have the TCS serviced by your dealer as soon aspossible.




221

SERVICE VARIABLE EFFORTSTEERING


If the vehicle has the variable effort steeringsystem, this message displays if this system is notfunctioning properly. See Steering on page 296for more information. Have the system serviced byyour dealer as soon as possible.This message displays only while the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds for two seconds whilethis message is displayed. Press the set/resetbutton to acknowledge this message and to clearit from the screen.This message continues to display if it has notbeen acknowledged when the engine is turned off.It also re-displays for three seconds if themessage has been acknowledged, but thecondition still exists when the engine is turned off.If the condition still exists, the messagere-appears when the engine is turned on.

SERVICE VEHICLE SOONThis symbol comes onwith this message.

This message displays when a non-emissionsrelated malfunction occurs. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer as soon as possible.




222

STABILITY CONTROL ACTIVE


If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak® Plus system,this message displays when the system isengaged and actively assisting the driver withdirectional control of the vehicle. Slipperyroad conditions may exist when this warningmessage is displayed, so driving should beadjusted accordingly. STABILITY CONTROLACTIVE also appears in the Head-UpDisplay (HUD), if your vehicle has this feature.

This message displays only while the ignition is inRUN. This message stays on until road conditionschange and StabiliTrak® Plus is not active.

This message cannot be acknowledged andcleared from the screen.

STABILITY CONTROL OFF


If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak® Plus system,this message displays when the system turns off.This message displays only while the ignitionis in RUN. A chime sounds once and the messagestays on for three seconds and then disappears.A warning light indicating that this system isdeactivated also appears on the instrument panelcluster. See Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light on page 178 or Enhanced TractionSystem Warning Light on page 179.

223

When the StabiliTrak® Plus system is off, thesystem will not be engaged and will not activelyassist the driver with directional control of thevehicle. See StabiliTrak® Plus System onpage 295.

Any of the following conditions may cause theStabiliTrak® Plus system to turn off:

• The StabiliTrak® Plus system on the GXPoption is manually turned off. See StabiliTrak®

Plus System on page 295 for moreinformation.

• The battery is low.

• There is a StabiliTrak® Plus system failure.See your dealer for service.

STARTING DISABLED DUE TOELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROLThis message displays when there is a malfunctionwith the electronic throttle control which preventsthe vehicle from starting. Have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

This message only appears while the ignition is inRUN, and will not disappear until the problemis resolved. A chime sounds for two seconds. Thismessage cannot be acknowledged.

STARTING DISABLED DUE TO THEFTSYSTEMThis message displays when the system detects amalfunction in the content theft-deterrent systemand prevents the vehicle from starting.

This message only appears while the ignition is inRUN, and will not disappear until the problemis resolved. A chime sounds for two seconds. Thismessage cannot be acknowledged.

224

TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE


If the vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), this message displays when the system ison. TRACTION CONTROL ACTIVE alsoappears in the Head-Up Display (HUD), if yourvehicle has this feature.

This message only displays while the ignition is inRUN and will not disappear until drivingconditions change and the TCS is no longeractive.

This message cannot be acknowledged or clearedfrom the screen.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF


If the vehicle has the Traction Control System(TCS), this message displays when the TCS turnsoff. TRACTION CONTROL OFF also appearsin the Head-Up Display (HUD), if your vehicle hasthis feature. This message only displays whilethe ignition is in RUN and disappears afterthree seconds. A chime sounds once and themessage stays on for three seconds andthen disappears. A warning light indicating thatthis system is deactivated also appears onthe instrument panel cluster. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) Warning Light on page 178 orEnhanced Traction System Warning Lighton page 179.

225

Any of the following conditions may cause theTCS to turn off:

• The TCS is turned off by pressing theTC (traction control) button located onthe center console. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 292 or EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 293 for moreinformation.

• The battery is low.

• There is a TCS failure. See your dealer forservice.

TURN SIGNAL ONThis message displays if the vehicle is driven formore than 0.75 mile (1.21 km) while one ofthe turn signals are on. It appears as a reminderto turn off the turn signal.

This message only displays when the ignition is inRUN. A chime sounds for two seconds and themessage will not disappear until the turn signal ismanually turned off, or a turn is completed.

DIC Vehicle CustomizationYour vehicle may have customization capabilitiesthat allow you to program certain features toone preferred setting. Customization features canonly be programmed to one setting on thevehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferredsetting for two different drivers.

All of the customization options may not beavailable on your vehicle. Only the optionsavailable will be displayed on your DIC.

The default settings for the customization featureswere set when your vehicle left the factory, butmay have been changed from their defaultstate since then. The customization preferencesare automatically recalled.

To change customization preferences, use thefollowing procedure.

226

Entering the Personal Programming Mode1. Turn the ignition on and make sure the

vehicle is in PARK (P).To avoid excessive drain on the battery, it isrecommended that the headlamps areturned off.

2. Press the options button until PERSONALPROGRAMMING MODE appears on the DIC.

3. Press the set/reset button to display the firstscreen.

4. Press the options button to access thesemodes:

Personal Programming Mode Screens

EXTERIOR LIGHTING DELAY: This screenallows this feature to be turned off, or allows theselection of the number of seconds the headlamps,sidelamps, taillamps, fog lamps, and back-uplamps are turned on after the key is removed fromthe ignition, or the vehicle is unlocked using theremote keyless entry transmitter.

If OFF is selected, the exterior lamps will notturn on.

If a time delay is chosen, the lamps will turn on forthe selected time. The time delay will becancelled and the exterior lamps will turn onautomatically when the key is removed from theignition, or the vehicle is unlocked using theremote keyless entry transmitter.

To program this mode, use the followingprocedure:

1. Press and release the set/reset button toscroll to the selection you want to program.Choose from OFF, 15, 30, 60, or 90 seconds.


INTERIOR LIGHTS WHEN DOOR CLOSED: Thisscreen allows this feature to be turned OFF or ON.

If OFF is selected, the interior lamps will turn offimmediately when the ignition is turned off and thelast open door is closed.

If ON is selected, the interior lamps will stay on forabout 25 seconds after the vehicle’s ignition isturned off and the last open door is closed.

227

To program this mode, use the following procedure:

1. Press and release the set/reset button toscroll to either OFF or ON.


INTERIOR LIGHTS WHEN KEY REMOVED: Thisscreen allows this feature to be turned OFF orON. This feature enables the interior lamps in thevehicle to turn on for about 25 seconds afterthe key is removed from the ignition.

If OFF is selected, removing the key from theignition will not cause the interior lamps to turn on.

If ON is selected, removing the key from theignition will cause the interior lamps to be turnedon for about 25 seconds.




AUTO DOOR UNLOCK: This screen allows thisfeature to be turned off, used for the driver’sdoor only, or for all the doors.

If OFF is selected, none of the doors will unlockwhen the vehicle’s transaxle is shifted intoPARK (P).

If DRIVER is selected, only the driver’s door willunlock when the vehicle’s transaxle is shiftedinto PARK (P).

If ALL is selected, all the doors will unlock whenthe vehicle’s transaxle is shifted into PARK (P).


1. Press and release the set/reset button toscroll to either OFF, DRIVER, or ALL.


228

AUTO DOOR UNLOCK ON: If DRIVER or ALLwas selected on the AUTO DOOR UNLOCKscreen, this screen allows selection of when thevehicle’s doors will unlock. The choices arewhen the key is removed from the ignition or whenthe vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).

If KEY-OUT is selected, the auto door unlock willfunction when the key is taken out of theignition.

If PARK is selected, the auto door unlock willfunction when the transaxle is shifted intoPARK (P).


1. Press and release the set/reset button toscroll to either KEY-OUT or PARK.


DELAYED LOCKING: This screen allows thisfeature to be turned OFF or ON. The key must beout of the ignition for this feature to work.

If OFF is selected, there will be no delayed lockingof the vehicle’s doors.

If ON is selected, the locking of the vehicle’sdoors will be delayed by five seconds aftera power door lock switch is pressed while the dooris open, or the LOCK button on the remotekeyless entry transmitter is pressed while any dooris open.




229

REMOTE LOCKS FEEDBACK: This screenallows selection for this option to be turned OFF,or gives the choice of two methods of verification;LIGHTS or LIGHTS and HORN; that indicatethe vehicle’s doors are locked when the LOCKbutton on the remote keyless entry transmitter ispressed.

If OFF is selected, this feature will not beprogrammed.

If LIGHTS is selected, the exterior lamps will flashwhen the LOCK button on the remote keylessentry transmitter is pressed.

If LIGHTS and HORN is selected, the exteriorlamps will flash when the LOCK button onthe remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed,and the horn will sound when the LOCK button onthe remote keyless entry transmitter is pressedagain within five seconds of the previouscommand.


1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to OFF,LIGHTS, or LIGHTS and HORN.


If the vehicle does not have a contenttheft-deterrent system, the next screens withPROGRAMMING FINISHED and DISPLAY OFFwill appear.

If the vehicle does have a content theft-deterrentsystem, the next screen will appear.

THEFT DETERRENT: The vehicle may have acontent theft-deterrent system. Once it isturned on, the system will activate if someone triesto enter the vehicle without using the remotekeyless entry transmitter or the correct key. Thisscreen allows this feature to be turned OFF or ON.

If OFF is selected, the content theft-deterrentsystem will not function.

If ON is selected, the content theft-deterrentsystem will be activated.

230

To program this mode, use the followingprocedure:1. Press the set/reset button to scroll to

OFF or ON.2. Press the options button again to advance to

the next screen.

KEY CYLINDER DISARM: If the vehicle has acontent theft-deterrent system, and ON wasselected on the THEFT DETERRENT screen, thisscreen allows this feature to be turned OFF orON. This feature determines whether the driver’sdoor key cylinder may be used to disarm thecontent theft-deterrent system.

If OFF is selected, the vehicle’s contenttheft-deterrent system can not be disarmed byunlocking the driver’s door using the driver’s doorkey cylinder. Selecting OFF prevents a thief fromdisarming the vehicle’s content theft-deterrentsystem by attacking the driver’s door key cylinder,and may make the vehicle more secure. However, ifOFF is selected, unlocking an armed vehicle byusing the driver’s door key cylinder and opening thedoor will cause the content theft alarm to activate.For this reason, it is recommended that the vehiclebe unlocked using the remote keyless entry systemwhen this feature is set to OFF.

If ON is selected, the vehicle’s contenttheft-deterrent system can be disarmed byunlocking the driver’s door using the driver’s doorkey cylinder.

To program this mode, use the following procedure:

1. Press the set/reset button to scroll toOFF or ON.


LOCK SWITCH ARM: If the vehicle has thecontent theft-deterrent system and ON wasselected on the THEFT DETERRENT screen, thisscreen allows this feature to be turned OFF orON. This feature controls whether the vehicle’scontent theft system can be activated using a doorlock switch.

If OFF is selected, locking the vehicle using adoor lock switch will not cause the vehicle’scontent theft system to arm.

231

If ON is selected, the content theft-deterrentsystem can be armed using the driver’s door lockswitch by pressing the driver’s door lock switchwhile the driver’s door is open and the key is not inthe ignition, or by pressing the front passenger’sdoor lock switch while the front passenger’s door isopen and the key is not in the ignition.




REMOTE START: If your vehicle has the remotestart feature, this screen allows this feature tobe turned OFF or ON. The remote start featureallows you to start the engine from outside of thevehicle using your remote keyless entrytransmitter. See “Remote Vehicle Start” underRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 87 for more information.

If OFF is selected, the remote start feature will bedisabled.

If ON is selected, the remote start feature will beenabled.




PROGRAMMING FINISHED will appear on thenext screen. This confirms that the personaloptions programming is complete.

232

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 284. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone, and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which you canhelp avoid distraction while driving.

233

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipmentto your vehicle, such as an audio system,CD player, CB radio, mobile telephone,or two-way radio, make sure that it can beadded by checking with your dealer. Also,check federal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them.Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Notice: The chime signals related to safetybelts, parking brake, and other functionsof your vehicle operate through theradio/entertainment system. If that equipmentis replaced or additional equipment is addedto your vehicle, the chimes may not work. Makesure that replacement or additional equipmentis compatible with your vehicle beforeinstalling it. See Accessories and Modificationson page 336.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 106 for more information.

Setting the TimeThe radio may have a button marked with an H orHR to represent hours and an M or MIN torepresent minutes.

234

Press and hold the hour button until the correcthour appears on the display. AM will appearfor morning hours. Press and hold the minutebutton until the correct minute appears onthe display. The time can be set with the ignitionon or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM stationbroadcasting Radio Data System (RDS)information, press and hold the hour and minutebuttons at the same time until UPDATED appearson the display. If the time is not available fromthe station, NO UPDATE will appear on thedisplay.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuningto an RDS broadcast station, it may take afew minutes for the time to update.

Radio with CD (Base Level)

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

235

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases, aradio station may broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters appear on the displayinstead of the frequency. RDS stations mayalso provide the time of day, a program type (PTY)for current programming, and the name of theprogram being broadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the systemon and off.

VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decrease thevolume.

SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV,the audio system adjusts automatically to makeup for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select MIN (minimum), MED (medium),or MAX (maximum). Each higher setting allows formore volume compensation at faster vehiclespeeds. Then, as you drive, SCV automaticallyincreases the volume, as necessary, to overcomenoise at any speed. The volume level shouldalways sound the same to you as you drive.To turn SCV off, press this button until OFFdisplays.

236

RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency andthe time. When the ignition is off, push this knob todisplay the time.

For RDS, push the RCL knob to change whatappears on the display while using RDS.The display options are station name, RDS stationfrequency, PTY, and the name of the program(if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), push the RCL knob whilein XM™ mode to retrieve four different categoriesof information related to the current song orchannel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, push theRCL knob until you see the desired display, thenhold the knob until the display flashes. Theselected display is now the default.

Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay shows the selection.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

w SEEK x: Press the up or the down arrow to goto the next or to the previous station and stay there.

The radio only seeks stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

w SCAN x: Press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until SCAN displays and a beepsounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next station. Presseither arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds untilPSCAN and the preset number appear onthe display and two beeps sound. The radio goesto the first preset station stored on thepushbuttons, plays for a few seconds, then goesto the next preset station. Press either SCANarrow again to stop scanning presets.

The radio only scan stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

237

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press EQ to select the equalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Wheneverthat numbered pushbutton is pressed,the station that was set returns and theequalization that was selected is stored forthat pushbutton.

6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

TONE: Press and release this button until BASS,MID (midrange), or TREB (treble) displays. TheSELECT LED indicator lights to show that the tonecontrol can be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knobto increase or to decrease. If a station is weakor has static, decrease the treble.

To return all of the tone controls to the middleposition, press and hold the TONE buttonuntil FLAT displays.

EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to selectcustomized equalization settings.

Up to six customized equalization settings, can beprogrammed, by performing the following steps:


2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knobto create the equalization.

3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.SELECT EQ # displays and the EQ symbolflashes.

4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to selectthe EQ number.

238

5. Press and hold the EQ button or push theSELECT knob to store the equalizationsetting and the number. EQ SAVED displaysand a beep sounds.

6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settingsand numbers.

EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory foruse with talk radio, but it can be preset to adifferent tone.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance betweenthe right and the left speakers, press and releasethis button until BAL displays. The SELECTLED indicator lights to show that the speakers canbe adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to movethe sound toward the right or the left speakers.

FADE: To adjust the fade between the front andthe rear speakers, press and release thisbutton until FADE displays. The SELECT LEDindicator lights to show that the speakers can beadjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to move thesound toward the front or the rear speakers.

Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button fortwo seconds returns all speaker settings tothe middle position.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Press the PROG TYPE button to activateprogram type select mode. PTY displays.

2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY displays, press eitherSEEK arrow to select the PTY and take youto the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY, whilethe PTY displays, press either SEEK arrowonce. If the PTY is not displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow twice to display the PTY andthen to go to another station.

5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program typeselect mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on thedisplay, go back to Step 1.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio searchesfor stations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

239

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:

1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program typeselect mode. PTY displays.


3. Once the desired PTY displays, press andhold either SCAN arrow, and the radiobegins scanning the stations in the PTY.

4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio scansfor stations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency allows the radio to switch to a strongerstation with the same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BAND fortwo seconds. AF ON displays. The radio canswitch to stations with a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for two seconds. AF OFF displays.The radio does not switch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets.Up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), canbe programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.

2. Press PROG TYPE to activate program typeselect mode. PTY displays.


4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Wheneverthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTYthat was set returns, if program type selectmode is activated.


240

RDS MessagesALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station, ALERT!displays. You will hear the announcement, even ifthe volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD isplaying, play stops during the announcement. Alertannouncements cannot be turned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supportedby all RDS stations.

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO displays. Press this button tosee the message. The message may display theartist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the INFObutton. A new group of words appear on the displayafter every press of the button. Once the completemessage has been displayed, INFO disappearsfrom the display until another new message isreceived. The last message can be displayed bypressing the INFO button. You can view the lastmessage until a new message is received or adifferent station is tuned to.

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF displays, the tunedstation broadcasts traffic announcements.To receive the traffic announcement from thetuned station, press this button. Bracketsare displayed around TRAF and when a trafficannouncement broadcasts on the tuned radiostation, you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button and theradio seeks to a station that does. When a stationthat broadcasts traffic announcements is found,the radio stops seeking and brackets are displayedaround TRAF. If no station is found thatbroadcasts traffic announcements, NO TRAFFICdisplays.

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,press the TRAF button to remove the bracketsor use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to goto a station that supports traffic announcements.

The radio plays the traffic announcement ifthe volume is low. The radio interrupts the play ofa CD if the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements and the brackets are displayed.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

241

Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCALIBRATE appears on the display it means thatthe radio has not been configured properly foryour vehicle and must be returned your dealer forservice.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takethe vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 275 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying. If you want to insert a CD when theignition is off, first press the eject button or pushthe RCL knob. If you insert a CD with the radio offand the ignition on, it starts to play.

The CD symbol appears on the display when aCD is loaded. The track number appears onthe display, as each new track starts to play.

If the ignition or the radio is turned off with a CDin the player, it stays in the player. When theignition or the radio is turned on, the CD startsplaying where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There may be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 279 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

242

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time, orattempt to play scratched or damaged CDs, youcould damage the CD player. When using theCD player, use only CDs in good conditionwithout any label, load one CD at a time, andkeep the CD player and the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, and debris.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

\ 1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed timeof the track appears on the display.

RDM 3 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.RDM and the track number appears on the display.Press RDM again to turn off random play.

4s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed timeof the track appears on the display.

EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the desiredcustomized equalization setting while playinga CD. The equalization is automatically setwhenever you play a CD. See “EQ” listedpreviously for more information.

w SEEK x: Press the down arrow to go to thestart of the current track if more than eight secondshave played. Press the up arrow to go to the nexttrack. If either arrow is held or pressed more thanonce, the player continues moving backward orforward through the CD.

243

w SCAN x: Press and hold either arrow formore than two seconds until SCAN and the tracknumber appear on the display and a beepsounds. The CD goes to the next track, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next track. Presseither arrow again to stop scanning.

RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long thecurrent track has been playing. To change thedefault on the display, track and elapsedtime, push the knob until you see the desireddisplay, then hold the knob until the displayflashes. The selected display is now the default.While elapsed time is showing, CD TIME displays.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio. The CD symbolappears on the display when a CD is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition or radiooff. CDs may be loaded with the ignition and radiooff, if this button is pressed first.

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There may have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label may be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

244

Radio with CD (MP3)

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).RDS features are available for use only on FMstations that broadcast RDS information.







While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or the call letters appear on thedisplay instead of the frequency. RDS stations mayalso provide the time of day, a program type(PTY) for current programming, and the name ofthe program being broadcast.


245

Playing the Radio


VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decrease thevolume.

RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency andthe time. When the ignition is turned off, push thisknob to display the time.

For XM™ (if equipped), push the RCL knob whilein XM™ mode to retrieve four different categoriesof information related to the current song orchannel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, push theRCL knob until you see the desired display, thenhold the knob until the display flashes. Theselected display is now the default.

SCV (Speed-Compensated Volume): With SCV,the audio system adjusts automatically to makeup for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select MIN (minimum), MED (medium),or MAX (maximum). Each higher setting allows formore volume compensation at faster vehiclespeeds. Then, as you drive, SCV automaticallyincreases the volume, as necessary, to overcomenoise at any speed. The volume level shouldalways sound the same to you as you drive. Toturn SCV off, press this button until OFF displays.

246

Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay shows the selection.


w SEEK x: Press the up or the down arrow togo to the next or to the previous station andstay there.


w SCAN x: Press and hold either SCAN arrowfor two seconds until SCAN displays and a beepsounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next station. Presseither SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds untilPSCAN and the preset number appear on thedisplay and a double beep sounds. The radio goesto the first preset station, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next preset station. Press eitherSCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.





4. Press EQ to select the equalization.



247


TONE: Press and release this button until BASS,MID (midrange), or TREB (treble) displays. TheSELECT LED indicator lights to show that the tonecontrol can be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knobto increase or to decrease. If a station is weakor has static, decrease the treble.

Pressing and holding the TONE button until FLATdisplays, returns all of the tone controls to themiddle position.

EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to selectcustomized bass, midrange, and trebleequalization settings.

Up to six customized equalization settings, can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:


2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knobto create the desired equalization.

3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.SELECT EQ # displays and the EQ symbolflashes.

4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to selectthe desired EQ number.

5. Press and hold the EQ button or push theSELECT knob to store the equalizationsetting and the number. A beep sounds andEQ SAVED displays.

6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settingsand numbers.

EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for usewith talk radio, but it can be set to a different tone.

248

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance betweenthe right and the left speakers, press and releasethis button until BAL displays. The SELECTLED indicator lights to show that the speakers canbe adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to movethe sound toward the right or the left speakers.

FADE: To adjust the fade between the front andthe rear speakers, press and release thisbutton until FADE displays. The SELECT LEDindicator lights to show that the speakers can beadjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to move thesound toward the front or the rear speakers.

Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button fortwo seconds returns all speaker settings tothe middle position.


1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program typeselect mode. The PTY symbol appears on thedisplay.


3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, presseither SEEK arrow to select the PTY and totake you to the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY, andthe PTY is displayed, press either SEEKarrow once. If the PTY is not displayed, presseither SEEK arrow twice to display the PTYand then to go to another station.

5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program typeselect mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on thedisplay, go back to Step 1.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio searchesfor stations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

249

w SCAN x: Scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:



3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press andhold either SCAN arrow, and the radio beginsscanning the stations in the PTY.


If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio scansfor stations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.




Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets.Up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), canbe programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:




4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Wheneverthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTYthat was set returns, if program type selectmode is activated.


250

RDS MessagesALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station, ALERT!displays. You will hear the announcement, even ifthe volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD isplaying, play stops during the announcement. Alertannouncements cannot be turned off.



If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. To scrollthrough the message, press and release the INFObutton. A new group of words appear on the displayafter every press of this button. Once the completemessage has been displayed, the informationsymbol disappears from the display until anothernew message is received. The last message can bedisplayed by pressing the INFO button. You canview the last message until a new message isreceived or a different station is tuned to.


If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button and theradio seeks to a station that does. When a stationthat broadcasts traffic announcements is found, theradio stops seeking and brackets are displayedaround TRAF. If no station is found that broadcaststraffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC displays.

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,press the TRAF button to remove the brackets oruse the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to astation that supports traffic announcements. If nostation is found that broadcasts trafficannouncements, NO TRAFFIC displays.

The radio plays the traffic announcement if thevolume is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CDif the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements and the brackets are displayed.


251

Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCALIBRATE displays it means that the radio hasnot been configured properly for your vehicleand it must be returned to your dealer for service.


Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and READING DISC and theCD symbol appears on the display. If you wantto insert a CD with the ignition off, first press theEJECT button or push the RCL knob.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts to play where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol appearson the display. As each new track starts toplay, the track number appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.




252



\ 1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed timeof the track appears on the display.

RDM 2 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.RDM and the track number appears on the display.Press RDM again to turn off random play.

3 # (Next Folder): This button does not have afunction for non-MP3 CDs.

4s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed timeof the track appears on the display.

6 ! (Previous Folder): This button does nothave a function for non-MP3 CDs.

EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the desiredcustomized equalization setting while playinga CD. The equalization is automatically setwhenever a CD is played. See “EQ” listedpreviously for more information.

w SEEK x: Press the up arrow to go to thestart of the next track. Press the down arrow to goto the start of the previous track. Pressingeither arrow for more than two seconds searchesthe previous or next tracks at two tracks persecond. When the track number that you wouldlike to play appears on the display, releasethe arrow to stop searching and to play the track.

253

w SCAN x: Press and hold either arrow formore than two seconds until SCAN and the tracknumber appear on the display and a beepsounds. The CD goes to the next track, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next track. Presseither arrow again to stop scanning.

RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long thecurrent track has been playing. To change thedefault on the display, track and elapsedtime, push the knob until you see the desireddisplay, then hold the knob until the displayflashes. The selected display is now the default.While elapsed time appears on the display,CD TIME displays.



EJECT: Press this button to eject a CD. Eject maybe activated with either the ignition or radio off.CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition offif this button is pressed first.

Playing an MP3 CD-R DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playingan MP3 CD-R disc. For more information onhow to play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3on page 269 later in this section.

CD Messages






254

• The format of the CD may not be compatible.See Using an MP3 on page 269 later in thissection.





Radio with Six-Disc CD

If your vehicle has the Monsoon audio system,included are nine speakers and an eight channelamplifier. The radio displays MONSOON whenthe radio or the ignition is turned on. Seeyour dealer for details.

255

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). RDS features are available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDS information.







While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters appear on the displayinstead of the frequency. RDS stations mayalso provide the time of day, a program type (PTY)for current programming, and the name of theprogram being broadcast.


256

Playing the Radio


VOLUME: Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decrease thevolume.

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency andthe time. When the ignition is off, press thisknob to display the time.

For RDS, press the RCL knob to change whatappears on the display while using RDS. Thedisplay options are station name, RDS stationfrequency, PTY, and the name of the program(if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press the RCL knob whilein XM mode to retrieve four different categoriesof information related to the current song orchannel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theRCL knob until you see the desired display,then hold the knob until the display flashes. Theselected display is now the default.

AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press thisbutton to select MIN (minimum), MED (medium),or MAX (maximum). Each higher setting allows formore volume compensation at faster vehiclespeeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volumeincreases the volume, as necessary, to overcomenoise at any speed. The volume level shouldalways sound the same to you as you drive.To turn automatic volume off, press this buttonuntil OFF displays.

257

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay shows the selection.


s SEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to goto the next or to the previous station and stay there.


s SCAN t: Press and hold either SCAN arrowfor two seconds until SC displays and a beepsounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next station. Presseither SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds. PRESETSCAN appears on the display and a double beepsounds. The radio goes to the first preset stationstored on the pushbuttons, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next preset station. Press eitherSCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.





4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.



258


AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID(midrange), or TREB (treble) displays. Turnthe knob to increase or to decrease. If a station isweak or noisy, decrease the treble.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middleposition, select BASS, MID, or TREB and pushand hold the AUDIO knob. The display leveladjusts to the middle position and a beep sounds.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker control is displayed.CENTERED displays and one beep sounds.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press thisbutton to select customized equalization settingsdesigned for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, andclassical.

To return to the manual mode, press the AUTOEQ button until CUSTOM displays. Then manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, and treble using theAUDIO knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between theright and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knobuntil BAL (balance) displays. Turn the knob tomove the sound toward the right or the leftspeakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rearspeakers, push and hold the AUDIO knobuntil FAD (fade) displays. Turn the knob to movethe sound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and the fade to themiddle position, select balance or fade and pushand hold the AUDIO knob. The display leveladjusts to the middle position and a beep sounds.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker controls are displayed.CENTERED displays and one beep sounds.

259


1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. P-TYPE and the lastselected PTY displays.

2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, presseither SEEK arrow to select and to takeyou to the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY, andthe PTY is displayed, press either SEEKarrow once. If the PTY is not displayed, presseither SEEK arrow twice to display the PTYand then to go to another station.

5. Press P-TYPE to exit program typeselect mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on thedisplay, go back to Step 1.

If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radiosearches for stations with the selected PTY andtraffic announcements.

To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and holdthe P-TYPE button until a beep sounds on thePTY you want to interrupt with. When selected, anasterisk appears beside that PTY on the display.You may select multiple interrupts, if desired.When you are listening to a CD, the last selectedRDS station interrupts play, if that selectedprogram type format is broadcast.

SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:



3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press andhold either SCAN arrow, and the radio beginsscanning the stations in the PTY.


If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radioscans for stations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

260




Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:




4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Wheneverthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTYthat was set returns.


RDS Messages

ALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station, ALERT!displays. You will hear the announcement, even ifthe volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD isplaying, play stops during the announcement. Alertannouncements cannot be turned off.



261

If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. Toscroll through the message, press and release theINFO button. A new group of words appear onthe display after every press of this button. Oncethe complete message has displayed, INFOdisappears from the display until another newmessage is received. The last message canbe displayed by pressing the INFO button. Youcan view the last message until a new message isreceived or a different station is tuned to.


If the current tuned station does not broadcasttraffic announcements, press the TRAF button andthe radio seeks to a station that does. When astation that broadcasts traffic announcements isfound, the radio stops seeking and bracketsare displayed around TRAF. If no station is found,NO TRAFFIC displays.

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,press the TRAF button to remove the bracketsor use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to goto a station that supports traffic announcements.If no station is found that broadcasts trafficannouncements, NO TRAFFIC displays.

The radio plays the traffic announcement if thevolume is low. The radio interrupts the playof a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements and the brackets are displayed.



262

Radio Messages

CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio systemhas been calibrated for your vehicle from thefactory. If CAL ERR displays it means thatthe radio has not been configured properly for thevehicle and it must be returned to your dealerfor service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takeyour vehicle to your dealer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appears onthe CD. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number appears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs andthe smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.



263


Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insertmore than one CD into the slot at a time,or attempt to play scratched or damaged CDs,you could damage the CD player. Whenusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.


LOAD CDZ: Press the LOAD side of thisbutton to load CDs into the CD player. This CDplayer holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the LOAD button.

3. Wait for the light, located to the right of theslot, to turn green.

4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD button fortwo seconds.A beep sounds and the light, located to theright of the slot, begins to flash.

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

4. Once the CD is loaded, the light beginsflashing again. Press the LOAD buttonagain. Once the light turns green, load thenext disc. Repeat this procedure for each CD.The CD player takes up to six CDs. Do nottry to load more than six.

To load more than one CD but less than six,complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loadingCDs, the radio begins to play the last CD loaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, anumber for each CD displays.

264

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number appears on thedisplay. To play a specific CD, first press theCD AUX button, then press the numberedpushbutton that corresponds to the CD. A smallbar appears under the CD number that isplaying and the track number appears.If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

LOAD CDZ (Eject): Press the CD eject sideof this button to eject a CD(s). A beep sounds andthe indicator light flashes to let you know whena CD is being ejected.

REMOVE CD displays. The CD can be removed.If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds,the CD is automatically pulled back into the player.If the CD is pushed back into the player, beforethe 25 second time period is complete, the playersenses an error and tries to eject the CDseveral times before stopping.

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button toeject a CD after trying to push it in manually. Theplayer’s 25-second eject timer resets at eachpress of eject, causing the player to not eject theCD until the 25-second time period has elapsed.

Once the player stops and the CD is ejected,remove the CD. After removing the CD, push thePWR knob off and then on again, or wait forthe system to reset. This clears the CD-sensingfeature and enables CDs to be loaded intothe player again.

{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release this button toplay the passage. The elapsed time of the trackappears on the display.

FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button toadvance quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release this button toplay the passage. The elapsed time of the trackappears on the display.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entireCD can be repeated.

265

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, pressand release the RPT button. RPT displays.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for two seconds.RPT displays. Press RPT again to turnoff repeat play.

RDM (Random): With random, you can listen tothe tracks in random, rather than sequential,order, on one CD or on all of the CDs.

To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listeningto in random order, press and release theRDM button. RANDOM ONE displays. PressRDM again to turn off random play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that areloaded, in random order, press and holdRDM for more than two seconds. A beepsounds and RANDOM ALL displays. PressRDM again to turn off random play.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): PressAUTO EQ to select the desired equalization settingwhile playing a CD. The equalization is setwhenever a CD is played. For more information onAUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously inthis section.

sSEEK t: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track, if more than ten secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to thenext track. If either arrow is held or pressed morethan once, the player continues moving backwardor forward through the CD.

sSCAN t: To scan one CD, press and holdeither SCAN arrow for more than two seconds untilSCAN displays and a beep sounds. Use thisfeature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of thecurrently selected CD. Press either SCAN arrowagain, to stop scanning.

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds until CDSCAN displays and a beep sounds. Use thisfeature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track ofeach loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrowagain, to stop scanning.

266

RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how longthe current track has been playing. To change thedefault on the display, track and elapsed time,press the knob until you see the desired display,then hold the knob until the display flashes.The selected display is now the default.

BAND: Press this button to play the radio when aCD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remainssafely inside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio.

Using Song List ModeThe six-disc CD changer has a feature calledsong list. This feature is capable of saving 20 trackselections.

To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at leastone CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously inthis section for more information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not insong list mode. S-LIST should not appear inthe display. If S-LIST is present, pressthe SONG LIST button to turn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use the SEEKSCAN right arrow to locate the track to besaved. The track begins to play.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button tosave the track into memory. When SONGLIST is pressed, one beep sounds. Aftertwo seconds of continuously pressingthe SONG LIST button, two beeps sound toconfirm that the track has been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

S-LIST FULL displays if you try to save more than20 selections.

To play the song list, press the SONG LISTbutton. One beep sounds and S-LIST displays.The recorded tracks begins to play in theorder they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEKSCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved trackreturns the song list to the first saved track.

267

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song liston. S-LIST displays.

3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select thedesired track to be deleted.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button fortwo seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,one beep sounds. After two seconds ofcontinuously pressing the SONG LIST button,two beeps sound to confirm that the trackhas been deleted.

After a track has been deleted, the remainingtracks are moved up the list. When another trackis added to the song list, the track is added tothe end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform the followingsteps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song liston. S-LIST displays.

3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button formore than four seconds. One beep sounds,followed by two beeps after two seconds, anda final beep sounds after four seconds.S-LIST EMPTY displays indicating the songlist has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list containssaved tracks from that CD, those tracks areautomatically deleted from the song list. Any trackssaved to the song list again are added to thebottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the SONG LISTbutton. One beep sounds and S-LIST is removedfrom the display.

268

CD Messages










Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R disc.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files onone disc.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension, other file extensions may not work.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum are available for display by the radiowhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album.Each folder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burningan MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It isusually better to burn the disc all at once.

269

The player is able to read and play a maximum of50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and255 files. Long file names, folder names, orplaylist names may use more disc memory spacethan necessary. To conserve space on thedisc, minimize the length of the file, folder orplaylist names. You can also play an MP3 CD thatwas recorded using no file folders. The systemcan support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keepthe depth of the folders to a minimum in orderto keep down the complexity and confusionin trying to locate a particular folder duringplayback. If a CD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are ignored.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If the rootdirectory has compressed audio files, thedirectory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All filescontained directly under the root directory areaccessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always be accessedbefore root folders or files.

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions do not function on aCD that was recorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of the folder theradio displays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all files arelocated under the root folder. The folder down andthe folder up buttons search playlists (Px) first andthen go to the root folder. When the radio displaysthe name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.

270

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists, thenplay begins from the first track under the rootdirectory. When all tracks from the rootdirectory have played, play continues fromfiles according to their numerical listing. Afterplaying the last track from the last folder,play begins again at the first track of the firstfolder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as the defaultdisplay. See RCL later in this section for moreinformation. The new track name appears on thedisplay.

File System and NamingThe song name that is displayed is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the songname is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radiodisplays the file name without the extension(such as .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 32 characters or 4 pagesare shortened. The display does not show partsof words on the last page of text and the extensionof the filename is not displayed.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsYou can access preprogrammed playlists whichwere created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™,or Real Jukebox™ software, however, you do nothave editing capability. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in, and READING displays. TheCD should begin playing and the CD symbolappears on the display. If you want to insert a CDwith the ignition off, first press the EJECTbutton or the RCL knob.

271

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the last selected audiosource.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberappears on the display.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.






\ 1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within a track. Press andhold this pushbutton for less than two seconds toadvance at 10 times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto advance at 20 times the normal playing speed.Release this pushbutton to play the track. FWDand the elapsed time of the track appears on thedisplay.

272

RDM 2 (Random): To repeat the tracks in thecurrent folder or playlist, press and releasethis pushbutton. FOLDER RANDOM displays.Once all of the tracks in the current folderor playlist have been played, the system moveson to the next folder or playlist and plays all of thetracks in random order.

To repeat the tracks on the CD, press and holdthis pushbutton for two seconds. A beep soundsand DISC RANDOM displays. This featuredoes not work with playlists.

When in random, pressing and releasing eitherSEEK arrow takes you to the next or previousrandom track.

Press and release this pushbutton again to turn offrandom play. NO RANDOM displays.

3 # (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to goto the first track in the next folder or playlist. Ifthe disc contains playlists, it goes throughthe playlist, then the folders. Pressing this buttonwhile in folder random mode takes you to thenext folder and random the tracks in that folder.This function does not work on a CD that does notcontain folders or playlists.

4 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold thispushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at10 times the normal playing speed. Press and holdit for more than two seconds to reverse at 20 timesthe normal playing speed. Release this pushbuttonto play the track. REV and the elapsed time of thetrack appears on the display. If this pushbutton ispressed for more than 20 seconds, the radio stopsreversing and begins to play.

6 ! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbuttonto go to the first track in the previous folder orplaylist. If the disc contains playlists, it goesthrough the playlist, then the folders. Pressing thispushbutton while in folder random mode takesyou to the previous folder and random the tracksin that folder. This function does not work ona CD that does not contain folders or playlists.

w SEEK x: Press the up arrow to go to the startof the next track. Press the down arrow to go tothe start of the previous track. Pressing eitherarrow for more than two seconds searchesthe previous or next tracks at two tracks persecond. When the track number that you wouldlike to play appears on the display, releasethe arrow to stop searching and to play the track.

273

TUNE: Turn this knob to fast track reverse oradvance through tracks in all folders or playlists.The track number and file name appears onthe display for each track. Turn this knob while inrandom to fast track reverse or advance thetracks in sequential order.

RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch betweentrack mode, folder/playlist mode, and time ofday mode. The display shows only 13 characters,but there can be up to three pages of text.If there are more than 13 characters in the song,folder, or playlist name pushing this knobwithin two seconds takes you to the next page oftext. If there are no other pages to be shown,pushing this knob within two seconds takes you tothe next display mode.

Track mode displays the current track number andthe ID3 tag song name.

Folder/playlist mode displays the current folder orplaylist number and the folder/playlist name.

Time of day mode displays the time of day andthe ID3 tag song name.

To change the default on the display, push thisknob until you see the desired display, thenhold this knob for two seconds. The radio producesone beep and the selected display is now thedefault.

INFO (Information): INFO displays whenever acurrent track has ID3 tag information. Pressthis button to display the artist name and albumcontained in the tag. INFO disappears fromthe display when the information in the ID3 taghas finished.



EJECT: Press this button to eject a CD. Eject maybe activated with either the ignition or radio off.CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition offif this button is pressed first.

274

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehiclemoves into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after a four seconddelay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

275

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously beenin another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receiverscannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message isreceived after having your vehicle serviced, check with theservicing facility.

Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.

276

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft ofyour vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio ismoved to a different vehicle, it will not operate andLOCKED will appear on the display.

When the radio and vehicle are turned off, theblinking red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® isarmed.

With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will notoperate if stolen.

Audio Steering Wheel Controls

If your vehicle has this feature, some audiocontrols can be adjusted at the steering wheel.They include the following:

w t u x (Seek): Press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous station andstay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until FREQUENCY SCAN appearson the display. The radio will go to a station, playfor a few seconds, then go to the next station.Press either arrow again to stop scanning.

The sound will mute while seeking or scanning.

277

The radio will only seek or scan stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

When a CD is playing, press either arrow togo to the previous or next track, if more thaneight seconds have played. If either arrow is held orpressed more than once, the player will continuemoving backward or forward through the CD.

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).

1 - 6: Press this button to scan the stations thatare programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.The radio will go to the next preset stationstored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds,then go on to the next preset station. Press thisbutton again to stop scanning. The radio willonly scan preset stations with a strong signal thatare in the selected band.

$ (Mute/OnStar®): Press and release this buttonto silence the audio system. Press it again, orany other radio button to turn the sound on.

If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar, press andhold this button to interact with the OnStarsystem. See the OnStar® System on page 122 inthis manual for more information.

r (Play): When listening to the radio, press thisbutton to play a cassette tape or CD.

wux (Volume): Press the up or down arrowto increase or decrease the volume.

Radio ReceptionYou may experience frequency interference andstatic during normal radio reception if itemssuch as cellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devicesare plugged into the accessory power outlet.If there is interference or static, unplug the itemfrom the accessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stationsboosts the power levels during the day, and thenreduce these levels during the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. When this happens,try reducing the treble on your radio.

278

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsreach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels can causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio could display NO XM SIGNAL to indicateinterference.

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

279

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rearwindow defogger, located in the rear window.Make sure that the inside surface of the rearwindow is not scratched and that the lines on theglass are not damaged. If the inside surface isdamaged, it could interfere with radio reception.Also, for proper radio reception, the antennaconnector at the top-center of the rear windowneeds to be properly attached to the post onthe glass.

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in sometinting materials will interfere with or distort theincoming radio reception. Any damagecaused to your backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will not be coveredby your warranty.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object toclear the inside rear window may damagethe rear window antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Do not clear theinside rear window with sharp objects.

Because this antenna is built into your rearwindow, there is a reduced risk of damage causedby car washes and vandals.

If static is heard on the radio, when the rearwindow defogger is turned on, it could mean thata defogger grid line has been damaged. If thisis true, the grid line must be repaired.

If you choose to add a cellular telephone to yourvehicle, and the antenna needs to be attachedto the glass, make sure that you do not damagethe grid lines for the AM-FM antenna. Thereis enough space between the lines to attach acellular telephone antenna without interfering withradio reception.

280

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance ofthe XM™ system may be affected if the sunroofis open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

Chime Level AdjustmentThe radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chimelevel. To change the volume level of the chime,press and hold pushbutton 6 with the ignition onand the radio power off. The volume level willchange from the normal level to loud, and LOUDwill appear on the radio display. To change back tothe default or normal setting, press and holdpushbutton 6 again. The volume level will changefrom the loud level to normal, and NORMAL willappear on the radio display. Each time the chimevolume is changed, three chimes will sound toindicate the new volume selected. Removing theradio and not replacing it with a factory radio orchime module will disable vehicle chimes.

281

✍ NOTES

282

Your Driving, the Road, and YourVehicle ..................................................... 284Defensive Driving ...................................... 284Drunken Driving ........................................ 285Control of a Vehicle .................................. 288Braking ...................................................... 288Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 289Braking in Emergencies ............................. 291Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 292Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .............. 293StabiliTrak® Plus System ........................... 295Steering .................................................... 296Off-Road Recovery .................................... 299Passing ..................................................... 299Loss of Control .......................................... 301Driving at Night ......................................... 302

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 303City Driving ............................................... 306Freeway Driving ........................................ 307Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 308Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 309Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 309Winter Driving ........................................... 311If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 316Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 316Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 317

Towing ........................................................ 322Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 322Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 322Towing a Trailer ........................................ 324

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

283

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 17.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

284

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the numberone contributor to the highway death toll,claiming thousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

285

According to the American Medical Association,a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end upwith a BAC of about 0.06 percent. The personwould reach the same BAC by drinking three4 ounce (120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixeddrinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) ofliquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage ofbody water than men. Since alcohol is carried inbody water, this means that a woman generallywill reach a higher BAC level than a man ofher same body weight will when each has thesame number of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both Franceand Germany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

286

But the ability to drive is affected well below a BACof 0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of many people are impaired at a BACapproaching 0.05 percent, and that the effects areworse at night. All drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent. Statistics show that thechance of being in a collision increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of 0.05 percent or above.A driver with a BAC level of 0.06 percent hasdoubled his or her chance of having a collision. At aBAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance of this driverhaving a collision is 12 times greater; at a level of0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up.“I will be careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might notbe able to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking. Please do not drink and driveor ride with a driver who has beendrinking. Ride home in a cab; or if youare with a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.

287

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make yourvehicle go where you want it to go. They are thebrakes, the steering, and the accelerator. Allthree systems have to do their work at the placeswhere the tires meet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 292 andEnhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 293.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 336.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 176.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths of asecond. But that is only an average. It might be lesswith one driver and as long as two or three secondsor more with another. Age, physical condition,alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even inthree-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). Thatcould be a lot of distance in an emergency, sokeeping enough space between your vehicle andothers is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

288

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS,this warning light on theinstrument panel willcome on briefly whenyou start your vehicle.

When you start your engine, or when you begin todrive away, your ABS will check itself. You mayhear a momentary motor or clicking noise while thistest is going on, and you may even notice that yourbrake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

289

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes ateach wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

290

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you, you will not havetime to apply your brakes if that vehicle suddenlyslows or stops. Always leave enough room upahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard andhold it down — may be the wrong thing to do. Yourwheels can stop rolling. Once they do, thevehicle cannot respond to your steering.

Momentum will carry it in whatever direction it washeaded when the wheels stopped rolling. Thatcould be off the road, into the very thing you weretrying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want to squeezethe brakes hard without locking the wheels. If youhear or feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brakepedal. This will help you retain steering control. Ifyou do have ABS, it is different. See Anti-LockBrake System (ABS) on page 289.

In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.

291

Traction Control System (TCS)If the vehicle has the 3800 Supercharged V6engine or the 5.3L V8 engine, it has a TractionControl System (TCS) that limits wheel spin. Thisis especially useful in slippery road conditions.The system operates only if it senses that oneor both of the front wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When this happens,the system works the front brakes and reducesengine power to limit wheel spin.

This symbol, along withthe TRACTIONCONTROL ACTIVEmessage, comes on theDIC screen when thesystem is active.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

When the traction control system is not working,one of these symbols will come on the instrumentpanel cluster.

This symbol is locatedon the instrument panelcluster.

This symbol, along with the message TRACTIONCONTROL OFF will display in the DIC forthree seconds when the traction control systemis disabled.

292

If there is a problem with the system, the servicetraction system will also appear on the DIC.When these symbols and messages appear onthe instrument panel and the DIC, the system willnot limit wheel spin. Adjust driving accordingly.

The traction control system automatically comeson whenever the vehicle is started. To limitwheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions,always leave the system on. But the tractioncontrol system can be turned off if needed. Thesystem should be turned off if the vehicle ever getsstuck in sand, mud, or snow and rocking thevehicle is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 316 and If Your Vehicle isStuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 316 formore information.

Press the tractioncontrol button locatedon the console toturn the system off.

If the system is limiting wheel spin when thetraction control button is pressed, the system willturn off instantly. Turn the system back on atany time by pressing the button again.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when the tractioncontrol system begins to limit wheel spin, thecruise control will automatically disengage. Whenroad conditions allow safe use of it, the cruisecontrol can be used again. See Cruise Control onpage 140.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 336 for more information.

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)If the vehicle has the 3800 V6 engine and anti-lockbrakes, it has an Enhanced Traction System(ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especiallyuseful in slippery road conditions. The systemoperates only if it senses that one or both of thefront wheels are spinning or beginning to losetraction. When this happens, the system reducesengine power and may also upshift the transaxleto limit wheel spin.

293

This symbol comes onthe Driver InformationCenter (DIC) whenthe ETS is limitingwheel spin.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when ETS beginsto limit wheel spin, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. When road conditionsallow safe use of it, the cruise control can be usedagain. See Cruise Control on page 140.

ETS operates in all transaxle shift lever positions.But the system can upshift the transaxle onlyas high as the chosen shift lever position, so usethe lower gears only when necessary. SeeAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 110.

One of these lights will appear on the instrumentpanel to indicate that the ETS is not on.

This symbol, alongwith the messageTRACTION CONTROLOFF will display on theDIC for three secondswhen the ETS is not on.

If there is a problem with the system, the servicetraction system will also come on in the DIC.See Enhanced Traction System Warning Light onpage 179. When this warning light is on, thesystem will not limit wheel spin. Adjust drivingaccordingly.

294

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, the ETS should always be left on. Butthe system can be turned off. The system should beturned off if the vehicle ever gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow and rocking the vehicle is required.See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out onpage 316 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 316 for moreinformation.

Press the tractioncontrol button locatedon the console toturn the system off.

If the system is limiting wheel spin when thebutton is pressed, the system will turn off instantly.Press the traction control button again to turnthe system on.

StabiliTrak® Plus SystemThe vehicle may have a vehicle stabilityenhancement system called StabiliTrak® Plus. It isan advanced computer controlled system thatassists with directional control of the vehiclein difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak® Plus comes on whenever the vehicleis started. It activates when the computersenses a discrepancy between the intended pathand the direction the vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak® Plus selectively applies brakingpressure at any one of the vehicle’s brakes tohelp control the vehicle in the steering direction.

This symbol, alongwith the STABILITYCONTROL ACTIVEmessage comes on theDriver InformationCenter (DIC).

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 200.You may also hear a noise or feel vibration in thebrake pedal. This is normal. Continue to steerthe vehicle in the desired direction.

295

This symbol will appearon the DIC.

If there is a problem detected with StabiliTrak®

Plus, this symbol along with the SERVICESTABILITY SYSTEM warning message willcome on the DIC.

See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 200.When this message is displayed, the system is notoperational. Driving should be adjusted accordingly.

To turn the StabiliTrak® system off (GXP only),press and hold the traction control button for morethan five seconds. A message will appear on theDIC indicating that StabiliTrak® has been turned off.You can turn the system back on at any time bypressing the button again.

If the vehicle is in cruise control when StabiliTrak®

Plus activates, the cruise control will automaticallydisengage. When road conditions allow safe use ofit, the cruise control can be used again. See CruiseControl on page 140 for more information.

SteeringPower SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning, youcan steer but it will take much more effort.

Variable Effort SteeringIf your vehicle has this steering system, the systemprovides less steering effort for parking and whendriving at speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h). Steeringeffort will increase at higher speeds for improvedroad feel.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.Here is why:Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

296

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface,the angle at which the curve is banked, andyour speed. While you are in a curve, speed isthe one factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both controlsystems — steering and braking — have to do theirwork where the tires meet the road. Unless youhave four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hardbraking can demand too much of those places. Youcan lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm those placeswhere the tires meet the road and make you losecontrol. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 292 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 293.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” throughthe curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.


297

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you come overa hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child dartsout from between parked cars and stops right infront of you. You can avoid these problems bybraking — if you can stop in time. But sometimesyou cannot; there is not room. That is the time forevasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes.

See Braking on page 288. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding the steeringwheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clockpositions, you can turn it a full 180 degrees veryquickly without removing either hand. But youhave to act fast, steer quickly, and just as quicklystraighten the wheel once you have avoidedthe object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

298

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your right wheels have droppedoff the edge of a road onto the shoulder whileyou are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn yoursteering wheel to go straight down the roadway.

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenly putthe passing driver face to face with the worst of alltraffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

299

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity. Forone thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatyour vehicle’s passenger side outside mirror isconvex. The vehicle you just passed may seemto be farther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

300

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If you do not have the Enhanced Traction System(ETS) or the Traction Control System (TCS), orif the system is off, then an acceleration skidis also best handled by easing your foot off theaccelerator pedal. See Enhanced Traction System(ETS) on page 293 or Traction Control System(TCS) on page 292.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off theaccelerator pedal and quickly steer the way youwant the vehicle to go. If you start steering quicklyenough, your vehicle may straighten out. Always beready for a second skid if it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.

301

Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. Ifyou do not have ABS, then in a braking skid,where the wheels are no longer rolling, releaseenough pressure on the brakes to get the wheelsrolling again. This restores steering control.Push the brake pedal down steadily when youhave to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels arerolling, you will have steering control.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

302

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

303

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply your brake pedallightly until your brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles or evengoing through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try to slowdown before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen ifa lot of water is standing on the road. If youcan see reflections from trees, telephone poles, orother vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

304

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly through deeppuddles or standing water, water can come inthrough your engine’s air intake and badlydamage your engine. Never drive through waterthat is slightly lower than the underbody of yourvehicle. If you cannot avoid deep puddles orstanding water, drive through them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.



As little as six inches of flowing watercan carry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore police warningsigns, and otherwise be very cautiousabout trying to drive through flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 400.

305

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 307.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corneris busy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be runningthe red light.

306

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also calledthruways, parkways, expressways, turnpikes,or superhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.

Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailing speed.Switch on your turn signal, check your mirrors, andglance over your shoulder as often as necessary.Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

307

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to maketoo many miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needsservice, have it done before starting out. Of course,you will find experienced and able service expertsin GM dealerships all across North America. Theywill be ready and willing to help if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

308

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum of thetires on the road, the drone of the engine, and therush of the wind against the vehicle that can makeyou sleepy. Do not let it happen to you! If it does,your vehicle can leave the road in less than asecond, and you could crash and be injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated,with a comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

309

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, your brakescould get so hot that they would not workwell. You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let your engine assistyour brakes on a steep downhill slope.

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. Your brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have yourengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transaxle, and you canclimb the hill better.

310

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 400.

311

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, a piece ofold carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to helpprovide traction. Be sure you properly secure theseitems in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between thetires and the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.

312

But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.If you have the Traction Control System (TCS) orthe Enhanced Traction System (ETS), it willimprove your ability to accelerate when driving ona slippery road. Even though your vehicle has atraction system you will want to slow down andadjust your driving to the road conditions. Undercertain conditions, you may want to turn the TCS orETS off, such as when driving through deep snowand loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle motion atlower speeds. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 292 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)on page 293.If you do not have TCS or ETS, accelerate gently.Try not to break the fragile traction. If youaccelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin andpolish the surface under the tires even more.Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too.

If you do have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS) on page 289. This system improves yourvehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on aslippery road. Whether you have ABS or not, youwill want to begin stopping sooner than you wouldon dry pavement. Without ABS, if you feel yourvehicle begin to slide, let up on the brakes a little.Push the brake pedal down steadily to get the mosttraction you can.Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you will justslide. Brake so your wheels always keep rollingand you can still steer.• Whatever your braking system, allow greater

following distance on any slippery road.• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be

fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.On an otherwise clear road, ice patches mayappear in shaded areas where the sun cannotreach, such as around clumps of trees, behindbuildings, or under bridges. Sometimes thesurface of a curve or an overpass may remainicy when the surrounding roads are clear. If yousee a patch of ice ahead of you, brake beforeyou are on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

313

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in aserious situation. You should probably stay withyour vehicle unless you know for sure that you arenear help and you can hike through the snow. Hereare some things to do to summon help and keepyourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police thatyou have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap around yourselfor tuck under your clothing to keep warm. You can run the engine to keep warm, but be

careful.

314

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, so you mightnot know it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blockingyour exhaust pipe. And check aroundagain from time to time to be sure snowdoes not collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it goa little faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for the heatthat you get and it keeps the battery charged.You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

315

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck,you will need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out whenyou are stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transaxle orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spinthe wheels too fast while shifting the transaxleback and forth, you can destroy the transaxle.See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out onpage 316.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 421.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.If your vehicle has traction control, you should turnthe traction control system off. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 292. Then shiftback and forth between REVERSE (R) anda forward gear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it may need to be towed out. Ifyour vehicle does need to be towed out, seeTowing Your Vehicle on page 322.

316

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weightyour vehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it may properly carry,the Tire and Loading Information label andthe Vehicle Certification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).The Tire and Loading Information label lists thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds. The vehicle capacity weight includesthe weight of all occupants, cargo, and allnonfactory-installed options.

Label Example

317

The Tire and Loading Information label also lists thetire size of the original equipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). Formore information on tires and inflation, see Tires onpage 400 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 408.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle, see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity for your vehicle.

If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 324 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules, andtrailering tips.

318

Item Description Total

AMaximum VehicleCapacity Weight forExample 1 =

1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtractOccupant Weight150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupantand Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)

Example 1 Example 2

319



1,000 lbs (453 kg)


1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationlabel for specific information about your vehicle’smaximum vehicle capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is found onthe rear edge of the driver’s door.

The label shows the gross weight capacity of yourvehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo.

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or rear axle.

Example 3

320

If the vehicle is going to carry a heavy load,spread it out. See “Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in this section.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

If things like suitcases, tools, packages, oranything else are put inside the vehicle, they willgo as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk of your vehicle.In a trunk, put them as far forward asyou can. Try to spread the weightevenly.

• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

321

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 498.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as dinghytowing, towing your vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground, and dolly towing, towing your vehiclewith two wheels on the ground and two wheels upon a device known as a dolly.

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What is the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure to read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will the vehicle be towed? Somevehicles have restrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is the vehicle ready to be towed? Just as youwould prepare your vehicle for a long trip, youwill want to make sure the vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving ona Long Trip on page 308.

322

Dinghy Towing

Notice: If you tow your vehicle with allfour wheels on the ground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Do not tow your vehicle with all four wheels onthe ground.

The vehicle was not designed to be towed with allfour wheels on the ground. If the vehicle mustbe towed, use a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” followingfor more information.

Dolly Towing

The vehicle can be towed using a dolly. To towyour vehicle using a dolly, follow these steps:

1. Put the front wheels on the dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).

3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition.

5. Release the parking brake.

323

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped withthe proper trailer towing equipment. To identifythe trailering capacity of the vehicle, read theinformation in “Weight of the Trailer” that appearslater in this section. Trailering is different thanjust driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering meanschanges in handling, durability, and fueleconomy. Successful, safe trailering takes correctequipment, and it has to be used properly.

That is the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before pulling a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transaxle, wheel assemblies, and tires are forcedto work harder against the drag of the addedweight. The engine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat. The trailer also addsconsiderably to wind resistance, increasing thepulling requirements.

324

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerHere are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you will be driving. Agood source for this information can be state orprovincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. Ask a hitchdealer about sway controls.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first1,000 miles (1 600 km) the new vehicle isdriven. The engine, axle, or other parts couldbe damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatthe vehicle tows a trailer, do not drive over50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and other partsof the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Do not drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on thevehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to dowith weight:

• The weight of the trailer

• The weight of the trailer tongue

• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs(454 kg). But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature, and how much the vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that is on the vehicle,and the amount of tongue weight the vehiclecan carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

325

Ask your dealer for our trailering information oradvice, or write us at our Customer AssistanceOfices. See Customer Assistance Offices onpage 496 for more information.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the total orgross weight of the vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo in it, and the people who will beriding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle, itwill reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry,which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehiclecan tow. And if towing a trailer, the tongue loadmust be added to the GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. See Loading YourVehicle on page 317 for more information aboutyour vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

When using a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).

After the trailer is loaded, weigh the trailer and thenthe tongue, separately, to see if the weights areproper. The correct weight could be achievedsimply by moving some items around in the trailer.

326

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure the vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upperlimit for cold tires. These numbers can be foundon the Tire and Loading Information label,that is located on the driver’s side center B-pillar.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 317. Besure not to go over the GVW limit for the vehicle,or the GAWR, including the weight of the trailertongue. If a weight distribution hitch is used, makesure not to go over the rear axle limit beforeapplying the weight distribution spring bars.

HitchesIt is important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by, and roughroads are a few reasons why the correct hitch isneeded. Here are some rules to follow:

• The rear bumper on the vehicle is not intendedfor hitches. Do not attach rental hitches orother bumper-type hitches to it. Use onlya frame-mounted hitch that does not attach tothe bumper.

• If any holes need to be made in the body of thevehicle to install a trailer hitch, then be sure toseal the holes later when the hitch is removed.If the holes are not sealed, deadly carbonmonoxide (CO) from the exhaust can get intothe vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on page 119.Dirt and water can, too.

Safety ChainsAlways attach chains between the vehicle and thetrailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer so that the tongue will not drop to theroad if it becomes separated from the hitch.Instructions about safety chains may be providedby the hitch manufacturer or by the trailermanufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’srecommendation for attaching safety chains and donot attach them to the bumper. Always leave justenough slack so the rig can be turned around. And,never allow safety chains to drag on the ground.

327

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure toread and follow the instructions for the trailerbrakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly.

• If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, do not tryto tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If youdo, both brake systems won’t work well, orat all.

• Even if your vehicle doesn’t have anti-lockbrakes, don’t tap into your vehicle’s brakesystem if the trailer’s brake system willuse more than 0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluidfrom your vehicle’s master cylinder. If itdoes, both braking systems won’t work well.You could even lose your brakes.

• Will the trailer brake parts take 3,000 psi(20 650 kPa) of pressure? If not, thetrailer brake system must not be used withyour vehicle.

• If everything checks out this far, then makethe brake fluid tap at the upper rear mastercylinder port. But don’t use copper tubingfor this. If you do, it will bend and break off.Use steel brake tubing.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,get to know the rig. Acquaint yourself with thefeel of handling and braking with the added weightof the trailer. And always keep in mind that thevehicle is now a good deal longer and not nearlyas responsive as the vehicle is by itself.

Before starting, check the trailer hitch and platform(and attachments), safety chains, electricalconnector, lamps, tires, and mirror adjustment. Ifthe trailer has electric brakes, start the vehicle andtrailer moving and then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check the electricalconnection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas when driving the vehicle without a trailer.This can prevent situations that require heavybraking and sudden turns.

328

PassingMore passing distance is needed up ahead whentowing a trailer. And, because the vehicle andtrailer are a good deal longer, distances betweenany vehicles that are passed must be greater,before returning to the proper lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, move thathand to the left. To move the trailer to the right,move that hand to the right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someone guide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid making very sharpturns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, make wider turns thannormal. Do this so the trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or otherobjects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers.Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen towing a trailer, the vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.Check with your dealer. The arrows on theinstrument panel will flash whenever signaling aturn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps will also flash, telling other drivers the vehicleand trailer are about to turn, change lanes, or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrumentpanel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on thetrailer are burned out. You may think drivers behindyou are seeing the turn signal when they are not. Itis important to check occasionally to be sure thetrailer bulbs are still working.

The vehicle has bulb warning lights. When a trailerlighting system is plugged into the vehicle’s lightingsystem, its bulb warning lights may not indicate ifone of the lamps goes out. So, when a trailerlighting system is plugged in, be sure to check thevehicle and trailer lamps from time to time to besure they are all working. Once the trailer lampshave been disconnected, the bulb warning lightscan once again indicate if one of the vehicle lampsis out.

329

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforestarting down a long or steep downgrade. Ifthe vehicle is not shifted down, the brakes mayhave to be used so much that they would get hotand no longer work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce thevehicle’s speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) toreduce the possibility of engine and transaxleoverheating.

If the vehicle has overdrive, it may be driven inTHIRD (3) instead of DRIVE (D).

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. Ifsomething goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if the rig ever has to be parked on a hill, hereis how to do it:

1. Apply the regular brakes, but do not shift intoPARK (P) yet.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are in place, releasethe regular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply theparking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

330

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply the regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• Start the engine

• Shift into a gear

• Release the parking brake

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingThe vehicle will need service more often when itpulls a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 473 for more information. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transaxle fluid, which should not beoverfilled, engine oil, drive belts, cooling,and brake systems. Each of these is covered inthis manual, and the Index will help locatethem quickly. If trailering, it is a good idea toreview this information before starting on a trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nutsand bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingThe cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 364.

331

✍ NOTES

332

Service ........................................................ 336Accessories and Modifications ................... 336California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 337Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 337Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 338Fuel ............................................................. 338

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 338Gasoline Specifications .............................. 339California Fuel ........................................... 340Additives ................................................... 340Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 341Filling the Tank ......................................... 342Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 344

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 344Hood Release ........................................... 345Engine Compartment Overview .................. 346Engine Oil ................................................. 350Engine Oil Life System .............................. 353Supercharger Oil ....................................... 355Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 355Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 357

Engine Coolant .......................................... 360Pressure Cap ............................................ 364Engine Overheating ................................... 364Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ..................................... 366Cooling System ......................................... 366Power Steering Fluid ................................. 376Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 377Brakes ...................................................... 378Battery ...................................................... 381Jump Starting ............................................ 382

Headlamp Aiming ........................................ 388Bulb Replacement ....................................... 391

Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 391Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ........... 391Front Turn Signal, Parking and

Fog Lamps ............................................ 394Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ...... 395Back-Up Lamps ......................................... 397License Plate Lamp ................................... 398Replacement Bulbs ................................... 398

Windshield Replacement ............................ 399

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

333

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 399Tires ............................................................ 400

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 401Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 405Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 408Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 409Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 414When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 415Buying New Tires ...................................... 416Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 417Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 418Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 419Wheel Replacement .................................. 419Tire Chains ............................................... 421If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 422Tire Inflator Kit (GXP) ................................ 424Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 435Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 436Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ............................................. 438Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 445Compact Spare Tire .................................. 447

Appearance Care ........................................ 448Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 448Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 449Leather ...................................................... 451Ultra Lux Suede ........................................ 451Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ................................................ 452Care of Safety Belts .................................. 452Weatherstrips ............................................ 452Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 453Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 453Finish Care ............................................... 453Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 454Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 454Tires ......................................................... 455Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 455Finish Damage .......................................... 456Underbody Maintenance ............................ 456Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 456Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 457


334

Vehicle Identification .................................. 458Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 458Service Parts Identification Label ............... 458

Electrical System ........................................ 459Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 459Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 459Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 459

Power Windows and Other PowerOptions .................................................. 459

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 460Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 460Underhood Fuse Block .............................. 462

Capacities and Specifications .................... 466


335

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

336

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English andmetric fasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use the wrongfasteners, parts can later break or falloff. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 511.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 78.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 487.

337

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep your engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

The 8th digit of your Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) shows the code letter or number thatidentifies your engine. You will find the VIN at thetop left of the instrument panel. See VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) on page 458.

Gasoline OctaneIf your vehicle has the 3800 V6 engine(VIN Code 2), use regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 or higher. If theoctane rating is less than 87, you may notice anaudible knocking noise when you drive, commonlyreferred to as spark knock. If this occurs, use agasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soonas possible. If you are using gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher and you hear heavyknocking, your engine needs service.

338

If your vehicle has the 3800 Supercharged V6engine (VIN Code 4) or the 5.3L V8 engine (VINCode C), use premium unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 91 or higher. You mayalso use regular unleaded gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s accelerationmay be slightly reduced, and you may notice aslight audible knocking noise, commonly referredto as spark knock. If the octane is less than87, you may notice a heavy knocking noise whenyou drive. If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.Otherwise, you might damage your engine. If youare using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higherand you hear heavy knocking, your engine needsservice.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 340 for additional information.

339

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission control label. If this fuel isnot available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 180. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by the typeof fuel used, repairs may not be covered byyour warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meetU.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valvesclean, or if your vehicle experiences problems dueto dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline thatis advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline.Also, your dealer has additives that will helpcorrect and prevent most deposit-related problems.

340

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in your fuel system and also damagethe plastic and rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.

General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel maybe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

341

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Keepsparks, flames, and smoking materialsaway from fuel. Do not leave the fuelpump unattended when refueling yourvehicle. This is against the law in someplaces. Keep children away from the fuelpump; never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; ifthe cap is released too soon, it will spring backto the right.

While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tetherbelow the fuel fill opening.

342

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 453.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 180.

The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayedon the Driver Information Center (DIC) if thefuel cap is not properly installed. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 200 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 180.

343

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can startup and injure you even when the engineis not running. Keep hands, clothing,and tools away from any underhoodelectric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

344

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the hood release handle with thissymbol on it. It is located inside thevehicle near the parking brake pedal.

2. Go to the front of the vehicle and release thesecondary hood latch, located near the centerfront of the engine compartment, by movingit to the right.

3. Lift the hood.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Then pull the hood down andclose it firmly.

345

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 3800 V6 Supercharged engine (3800 V6 engine similar), here is whatyou will see:

346

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 377.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 381.C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump

Starting on page 382.D. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse

Block on page 462.E. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling

System on page 366.F. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 364.G. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (low in

engine compartment). See Power SteeringFluid on page 376.

H. Supercharger Oil Fill Location (If Equipped).See Supercharger Oil on page 355.

I. Electric Cooling Fan. See Cooling System onpage 366.

J. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 350.

K. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 350.

L. Engine Coolant Bleed Valve. See “How to AddCoolant to the Radiator” under CoolingSystem on page 366.

M. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 357.

N. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 378.

O. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 355.

347

When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine, here is what you will see:

348

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 377.

B. Battery. See Battery on page 381.C. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse

Block on page 462.D. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump

Starting on page 382.E. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 364.F. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power

Steering Fluid on page 376.G. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”

under Engine Oil on page 350.

H. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 350.

I. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 357.

J. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 378.

K. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 355.

L. Engine Coolant Recovery Tank. See CoolingSystem on page 366.

349

Engine Oil

If this symbol, along withthe LOW OIL LEVELmessage appears on theDriver InformationCenter (DIC), it meansyou need to checkthe engine oil levelright away.

For more information, see LOW OIL LEVEL underDIC Warnings and Messages on page 200. Youshould check the engine oil level regularly;this is an added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 346for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oilseveral minutes to drain back into the oil pan.If you do not do this, the oil dipstick mightnot show the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

350

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tipof the dipstick, you will need to add at least onequart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.

This section explains what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 466.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe cross-hatched area that shows theproper operating range, the engine could bedamaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 346 for thelocation of the engine oilfill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range in thecross-hatched area. Push the dipstick all theway back in when you are through.

3800 V6 Engine

5.3L V8 Engine

351

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094MYour vehicle’s engine requires oil meetingGM Standard GM6094M. You should lookfor and use only an oil that meetsGM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

You should look for this information on the oilcontainer, and use only those oils that are identifiedas meeting GM Standard GM6094M and have thestarburst symbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

352

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both willprovide easier cold starting and better protectionfor the engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the engine oil. Therecommended oils with the starburst symbol thatmeet GM Standard GM6094M are all you will needfor good performance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on drivingconditions, the mileage at which an oil changewill be indicated can vary considerably. For the oillife system to work properly, you must reset thesystem every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil changeis necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON messagewill come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 200. Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions,the oil life system may not indicate that an oilchange is necessary for over a year. However, theengine oil and filter must be changed at leastonce a year and at this time the system must bereset. Your dealer has GM-trained servicepeople who will perform this work using genuineGM parts and reset the system. It is also importantto check the oil regularly and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sincethe last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

353

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange the engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Anytime the oil is changed, reset the systemso it can calculate when the next oil change isrequired. If a situation occurs where you change theoil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOON messageappearing on the DIC, reset the system.

To reset the oil life system, after the oil has beenchanged, use the following procedure:

1. Press the options button on the DIC untilENGINE OIL MONITOR appears on theDIC screen.

2. Press the set/reset button to reset the system.The next screen indicates that the engine oilmonitor system has been reset.If the vehicle is equipped with the trip computerDIC, when the gage button is pressed andthe OIL LIFE REMAINING mode appears, itshould read 100 percent OIL LIFEREMAINING.

3. Turn the key to OFF.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes backon when you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements thatmay be unhealthy for your skin and couldeven cause cancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean your skin and nailswith soap and water, or a good hand cleaner.Wash or properly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See the manufacturer’swarnings about the use and disposal of oilproducts.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

354

Supercharger OilBecause they are technically qualified and havethe proper tools, you should have your dealerperform this maintenance.

When to CheckSee Additional Required Services on page 476 forwhen the oil level should be checked.

What Kind of Oil to UseUse only the recommended supercharger oil. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 483.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterThe engine air cleaner/filter is located in theengine compartment on the driver’s side of thevehicle. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 346 for more information on location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. SeeScheduled Maintenance on page 473 for moreinformation. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

355

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filterdo the following:

1. Lift the filter cover tabs on top of the engineair cleaner/filter housing.

2. Push the filter cover housing toward theengine.

3. Pull out the filter.

4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

3800 V6 Supercharged Engine shown, 3800 V6Engine similar

5.3L V8 Engine

356

5. To reinstall the cover, position the tabsthrough the slots on the housing. If yourvehicle has one of the 3800 V6 engines, anotch on the sides of the filter cover willindicate the correct engagement.

6. Push the cover tabs on top of the housing tolock the cover in place.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check the automatic transaxle fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed inAdditional Required Services on page 476, andbe sure to use the transaxle fluid listed inRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 483.

357

How to Check Automatic TransaxleFluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage the transaxle. Too much can meanthat some of the fluid could come out and fallon hot engine or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause thetransaxle to overheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if you check the transaxlefluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be atnormal operating temperature, which is 180°F to200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

358

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear, pausing forabout three seconds in each one. Then,position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

The transaxle fluiddipstick handle has thissymbol on it, and islocated near the rear ofthe engine compartment.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 346for more information on location.

1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three secondsand then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be in thecrosshatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way.

359

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 483.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into the crosshatchedarea on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 483.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolantis designed to remain in the vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whicheveroccurs first, if only DEX-COOL® extended lifecoolant is added.

The following explains the cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If there isa problem with engine overheating or if coolantneeds to be added to the radiator, see EngineOverheating on page 364.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® engine coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

360

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner, atthe first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® engine coolantwhich will not damage aluminum parts. If thiscoolant mixture is used, nothing else needs to beadded.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

361

If coolant needs to be added more than four timesa year, have your dealer check the coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 483 for more information.

Checking CoolantThe coolant recoverytank cap has thissymbol on it.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 346for more information on the location of thecoolant recovery tank.

The vehicle must be on a level surface whenchecking the coolant level.

When the engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at the cold fill line or a little higher. Thecold fill line is marked with the same symbol asthe coolant recovery tank cap.

362

Adding CoolantIf more coolant is needed, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

If the coolant recovery tank is completely empty,add coolant to the radiator. See EngineOverheating on page 364.

{CAUTION:

Turning the pressure cap when theengine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost never haveto add coolant at the radiator. Never turnthe pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Occasionally check the coolant level in theradiator. For information on how to add coolant tothe radiator, see Cooling System on page 366.

363

Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 346for more information on location.

Engine OverheatingThere is a coolant temperature gage and awarning light on the instrument panel that indicatean overheated engine condition. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 180and Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Lighton page 179.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Turn itoff and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 366 forinformation on driving to a safe place inan emergency.

364

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 366 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

If No Steam is Coming From YourEngineAn overheat warning can indicate a seriousproblem.

If you get an engine overheat warning but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If an overheat warning occurs without any sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to doso, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Set the heater at the highest setting and thefan at the highest speed and open thewindows as necessary.

If the overheat warning no longer exists, thevehicle can be driven. Just to be safe, drive slowerfor about 10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, the vehicle can be driven normally.

If the warning continues, and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine forthree minutes while parked. If the warning isstill there, turn off the engine and get everyone outof the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see“Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”later in this section.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

365

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThe overheated engine protection operating modeallows the vehicle to be driven to a safe place in anemergency situation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, this protection mode alternatesfiring groups of cylinders to help prevent enginedamage. In this mode, there will be a significantloss in power and engine performance. The enginecoolant temperature gage indicator will move to theshaded area, and the engine coolant temperaturewarning light will come on, showing that anoverheated engine condition exists. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in theoverheated engine protection mode should beavoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil will beseverely degraded. Repair the cause of coolantloss, change the oil and reset the oil life system.See Engine Oil on page 350.

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Coolant Recovery TankB. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(s)C. Pressure Cap

3800 V6 Supercharged Engine shown,3800 V6 Engine similar

366

A. Pressure CapB. Electric Engine Cooling FansC. Coolant Recovery Tank

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

The coolant recovery tank is located in therear of the engine compartment on thepassenger’s side of the vehicle on the 3800 V6engines. The coolant recovery tank on the 5.3L V8engine is located in the rear of the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle,behind the engine air cleaner/filter.

5.3L V8 Engine

367

When the engine is cold, the coolant level shouldbe at or above the cold fill line on the coolantrecovery tank. To check the coolant level, look forthe cold fill line on the side of the coolantrecovery tank that faces the engine. If the level isnot correct, there may be a leak at the pressurecap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump, or somewhere else in thecooling system.

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine coolingfan(s) are running. If the engine is overheating,the fan(s) should be running. If the fan(s) are notrunning, the vehicle needs service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty. See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 366 for information ondriving to a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner, at30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

368

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery Tank

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

If you have not found a problem yet, but thecoolant level is not at the cold fill line, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® engine coolant at the coolantrecovery tank. See Engine Coolant on page 360for more information.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

369

When the coolant level in the coolant recoverytank is at the cold fill line, start the vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there is onemore thing you can try. You can add the propercoolant mixture directly to the radiator, but be surethe system is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the pressure cap — even alittle — they can come out at high speed.Never turn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system and pressurecap to cool if you ever have to turn thepressure cap.

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator(3800 V6 Engines)

Notice: Your engine has a specific radiator fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat and beseverely damaged.

1. You can remove the pressure cap when thecooling system, including the pressure capand upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turnthe cap slowly counterclockwise.


370

If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap andremove it.

{CAUTION:


3. Remove the Series III V6 engine cover shieldto access the bleed valve.

3.1. Clean the area around the engine oil filltube and cap before removing. Twistthe oil fill tube, with cap attached,counterclockwise and remove it.

3800 V6 Engine

371

3.2. Lift the engine cover shield at the front,slide the catch tab out of the enginebracket and remove the cover shield.

3.3. Put the oil fill tube, with cap attached, inthe valve cover oil fill hole until you areready to replace the cover shield.

4. After the enginecools, open thecoolant air bleedvalve located on thethermostat housingnear the upperradiator hose.

3800 V6 Supercharged Engine

Thermostat Housing

372

5. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture, up to the base of the fillerneck. See Engine Coolant on page 360for more information about the proper coolantmixture.If you see a stream of coolant coming from theair bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise,close the valve after the radiator is filled.

6. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from theengine and the compartment.

7. Replace the 3800 Series III V6 engine covershield.

7.1. Remove the oil fill tube, with capattached, from the valve cover.

7.2. Insert the catch tab on the cover shieldunder the bracket on the engine.

7.3. Place the hole in the cover shield overthe hole in the valve cover. Install oil filltube and cap by twisting clockwise.

8. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the coldfill line.

9. Put the cap back on the coolant recoverytank, but leave the pressure cap off.


373

10. Start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fan(s).

11. By this time, the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper DEX-COOL®

coolant mixture through the filler neck until thelevel reaches the base of the filler neck.

12. Then replace the pressure cap. At any timeduring this procedure if coolant begins to flowout of the filler neck, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tightand fully seated.

13. Check the coolant in the recovery tank. Thelevel in the coolant recovery tank should beat the cold fill line when the engine is cold.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolingSystem (5.3L V8 Engine)

Notice: Your engine has a specific coolingsystem drain and fill procedure. Failureto follow this procedure could cause yourengine to overheat and be severely damaged.If your engine’s cooling system needs tobe drained and re-filled, please see your dealer.


374

You can remove thepressure cap when thecooling system,including the pressurecap and upperradiator hose is nolonger hot. Turnthe pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise.

1. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans that there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap to removethe pressure cap.

{CAUTION:


3. Fill the cooling system with the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture, up to the baseof the filler neck. See Engine Coolant onpage 360 for more information aboutthe proper coolant mixture.

4. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from theengine and the compartment.

5. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the coldfill line.

6. Install the coolant recovery tank cap and thepressure cap.

7. If the coolant in the recovery tank is constantlylow, you should have a dealership servicedepartment inspect your vehicle for leaks.

375

Power Steering Fluid

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 346 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless a leak is suspected in thesystem, or an unusual noise is heard. A fluid lossin this system could indicate a problem. Havethe system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoirclean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick

The fluid level should be between the ADD andHOT marks when the engine is cold.

When the engine compartment is hot, the levelshould be at the HOT mark.

If the fluid is at the ADD mark when the engine iscold or hot, power steering fluid should be added.

376

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 483.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating the vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer FluidWhen the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,a LOW WASHER FLUID message along withthe washer symbol, comes on in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 200 for more information.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 346for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

377

Brakes

Brake Fluid

Your brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 346 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have yourbrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later your brakes will not work well, orwill not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If youadd fluid when your linings are worn, then you willhave too much fluid when you get new brakelinings. You should add or remove brake fluid, asnecessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When your brake fluid falls to a low level, yourbrake warning light will come on. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 176.

378

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 483.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 453.

379

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound may come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates may causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with your brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality GM brake parts.

380

When you replace parts of your brakingsystem — for example, when your brake liningswear down and you need new ones put in — besure you get new approved GM replacement parts.If you do not, your brakes may no longer workproperly. For example, if someone puts in brakelinings that are wrong for your vehicle, thebalance between your front and rear brakes canchange — for the worse. The braking performanceyou have come to expect can change in many otherways if someone puts in the wrong replacementbrake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 346 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

If the battery has a very low charge or is dead,you may not be able to remove the ignitionkey from the ignition switch or shift out ofPARK (P). Refer to Shifting Out of Park (P) onpage 117.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keep thebattery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 382 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

381

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL before settingthe parking brake.

382

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter or the accessory poweroutlet. Turn off the radio and all lamps that arenot needed. This will avoid sparks and helpsave both batteries. And it could savethe radio!

4. Open the hood on the other vehicle andlocate the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on that vehicle.You will not use your vehicle’s battery for jumpstarting. It has a remote positive (+) jumpstarting terminal, located on the underhoodfuse block, for that purpose.

If your vehicle has oneof the 3800 V6 engines,to uncover the remotepositive (+) terminal,press the tab atthe bottom of the fuseblock and lift thecover up.

3800 V6 and 3800 V6Supercharged Engines

383

If your vehicle has the5.3L V8 engine, touncover the remotepositive (+) terminal,remove the fuseblock cover.

Always use the remote positive (+) terminalinstead of the positive (+) terminal on thebattery. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 346 for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5.3L V8 Engine

384

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you need morelight.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdo not, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative willgo to a heavy, unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−), oryou will get a short that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts too. And do notconnect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

385

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal location on the vehiclewith the dead battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect itto the positive (+) terminal location on thevehicle with the good battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal location on thevehicle with the good battery. Use a remotenegative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes toa heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to aremote negative (–) terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

386

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part orRemote Negative (−) Terminal

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) andRemote Negative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal coverto its original position.

Jumper Cable Removal

387

Headlamp AimingThe vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aimingsystem. The aim has been preset at the factoryand should need no further adjustment.

However, If the vehicle is damaged in an accident,the headlamp aim may be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams atyou, this may also mean the vertical aim needs tobe adjusted.

It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to yourdealer for service if the headlamps need to bere-aimed. It is possible however, to re-aimthe headlamps as described in the followingprocedure.

The vehicle should be properly prepared asfollows:

• The vehicle should be placed so theheadlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a lightcolored wall.

• The vehicle must have all four tires on aperfectly level surface which is level allthe way to the wall.

• The vehicle should be placed so it isperpendicular to the wall.

• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, ormud on it.

• The vehicle should be fully assembled and allother work stopped while headlamp aiming isbeing done.

• The vehicle should be normally loaded with afull tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs(75 kg) sitting on the driver’s seat.

• Tires should be properly inflated.

Headlamp aiming is done with the low-beamheadlamps. The high-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beam headlampsare aimed properly.

388

To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 345 for more information.Find the aim dot on the lens of thelow-beam lamp.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of thelow-beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from the ground to theaim dot on the lamp. Record the distance.

4. At the wall measure from the groundupward (A) to the recorded distancefrom Step 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wallthe width of the vehicle at the height of themark in Step 4.

6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place apiece of cardboard or equivalent in front of theheadlamp not being aimed. This shouldallow only the beam of light from the headlampbeing aimed to be seen on the flat surface.

Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improvebeam cut-off when aiming. Covering aheadlamp may cause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage to the headlamp.

389

7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws,which are under the hood, near theheadlamps. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beam is aimed to thehorizontal tape line.The adjustment screws can be turned with a6 mm hex key bit socket or a 6 mm hex key.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until theheadlamp beam is aimed to the horizontaltape line. Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise or lower the angleof the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp ispositioned at the bottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on the left (A) showsthe correct headlamp aim. The lamp on theright (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the oppositeheadlamp.

Driver’s Side shown

390

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 398.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

Headlamps and Sidemarker LampsTo replace a headlamp or sidemarker bulb,do the following:

A. High-Beam HeadlampB. Low-Beam HeadlampC. Sidemarker Lamp

1. Open the hood. See Hood Release onpage 345 for more information.

391

2. Locate the metal retaining clip. Removethe bolt.

3. Pull up half-way on the metal retaining clipwhile pushing rearward on the headlamp.Align the square cut-out on the retaining clipwith the notch on the headlamp.

4. Pull the headlamp assembly straight out fromthe vehicle. Moving the headlamp up anddown slightly may help with its removal.

392

A. High-Beam HeadlampB. Low-Beam HeadlampC. Sidemarker Lamp

5. Turn the bulb socket ring one-quarter of a turncounterclockwise to remove it from theheadlamp assembly.

6. Pull the old bulb from the socket.

7. Place the new bulb into the socket.

8. Turn the bulb socket ring one-quarter turnclockwise to reinstall it back into theheadlamp assembly.

9. Carefully reinstall the headlamp assembly.

10. Push down on the metal retaining clipwhile pushing rearward on the headlamp,making sure the headlamp assembly issecure.

11. Reinstall the bolt and tighten to secure.

393

Front Turn Signal, Parking and FogLampsThe front turn signal, parking, and fog lamps(if equipped) are located below the headlampassembly.

A. Front Turn Signal/Parking LampB. Fog Lamp (If Equipped)

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Follow Steps 1 through 4 of the headlampreplacement procedure. See Headlampsand Sidemarker Lamps on page 391 for moreinformation.

2. Locate the front turnsignal/parking lamp(all models) andfog lamp bulbs(if equipped), whichare located belowthe headlampassembly.

The arrow indicates which is the turnsignal/parking lamp bulb. The fog lamp bulb isbelow it, if your vehicle has this bulb. If youneed to have fog lamp bulb replaced, see yourdealer for service.

394

3. Turn the bulb socket one-quarter of a turncounterclockwise to remove it from itsassembly.

4. Pull the old bulb from the socket and replaceit with a new one.

5. Turn the bulb socket a quarter turn clockwiseto reinstall it.

6. Reinstall the headlamp assembly.

7. Push down on the metal retaining clip whilepushing rearward on the headlamp, makingsure the headlamp assembly is secure.

8. Reinstall the bolt and tighten to secure.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplamps

A. TaillampB. Taillamps, Turn

Signal and Stoplamps

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 96 formore information.

2. Remove the convenience net, if equipped, byremoving the net hook attachments.

3. Remove the plastic cap from the trunk trim.

4. Pull the trunk trim and carpet away fromthe back of the trunk.

5. Remove the bottom bolt and two nuts.

395

6. Remove the taillampassembly by pullingit out from thevehicle.

7. Turn the appropriatelamp socket aquarter turncounterclockwiseand remove it.

8. Remove the old bulb.

9. Replace with a new bulb into the socket andturn the lamp socket clockwise to install it.

10. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by reversingSteps 2 through 5.

396

Back-Up LampsThe back-up lamps are located on the trunk lid.

To replace the back-up lamp bulb(s), do thefollowing:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 96 formore information. 2. Turn the appropriate lamp socket a quarter

turn counterclockwise and remove it.


4. Put the new bulb into the lamp socket.

5. Turn the bulb a quarter turn clockwise toreinstall it.

397

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 96

2. Turn the appropriate lamp socket a quarterturn counterclockwise and remove it.


4. Put the new bulb into the lamp socket.

5. Turn the bulb a quarter turn clockwise toreinstall it.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamps Bulb NumberBack-Up Lamp 3157

Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamp 3757 NAK* or5702 KA**

Front Sidemarker and LicensePlate Lamp 194

HeadlampsHigh-Beam Halogen 9005Low-Beam Halogen 9006

Stop/Taillamp/Turn Signal Lamps 3057* GT and Base Models with the Optional Fog Lamps** For Lamps Not Equipped with the Fog Function andGXP Models

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

398

Windshield ReplacementIf your vehicle is equipped with the Head-UpDisplay (HUD) system, keep in mind that yourwindshield is part of the HUD system. If you everhave to get your windshield replaced, be sureto get one that is designed for HUD or your HUDimage may look blurred or out of focus.

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 473 for more information on wiper bladeinspection.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. For the proper typeand length, see Normal Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 484. Here is how to remove thewiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector awayfrom the windshield.

2. While holding the wiper arm, pull the clip upfrom the blade connecting point, and pull theblade assembly down toward the windshieldto remove it from the wiper arm.

3. Install the new wiper blade onto the wiper armand snap the clip into place.

399

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included with yourvehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 317.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 408.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifthe tire’s tread is badly worn, or ifyour vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

400

Low-Profile Performance Tire (GXP)If your vehicle has P255/45R18 size tires on thefront wheels and P225/50R18 size tires on the rearwheels, they are classified as low-profileperformance tires. These tires are designed forvery responsive driving on wet or dry pavement.You may also notice more road noise withlow-profile performance tires and that they tend towear faster.

Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,they are more susceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damagecan occur when coming into contact with roadhazards like, potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into a curb. Your GMwarranty does not cover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correct inflation pressureand, when possible avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and other road hazards.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

401

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 418.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit: Maximum load that can be carriedand the maximum pressure needed to supportthat load.

402

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat. Ifyour vehicle has a compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire on page 447 and If a TireGoes Flat on page 422.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit: Maximum load that can be carried andthe maximum pressure needed to supportthat load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 408.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

Compact Spare Tire Example

403

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United Statesversion of a metric tire sizing system. The letter Pas the first character in the tire size means apassenger vehicle tire engineered to standards setby the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60,as shown in item C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as highas it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B means belted-biasply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carry aload. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

404

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatictransmission/transaxle, power steering, powerbrakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 408.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 317.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 317.

405

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rearaxle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 317.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side ofan asymmetrical tire, that must always faceoutward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number rangingfrom 1 to 279 that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 317.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 408 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 317.

406

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 415.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 418.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 317.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 317.

407

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This labelshows your vehicle’s original equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressures for your tireswhen they are cold. The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on the label, is theminimum amount of air pressure needed tosupport your vehicle’s maximum load carryingcapacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 317. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 447.

408

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) usesradio and sensor technology to check tire pressurelevels. If your vehicle has this feature, sensorsare mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly,except for the spare tire. The TPMS sensorsmonitor the air pressure in your vehicle’s tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure condition is detected,the TPMS will illuminate the low tire pressurewarning symbol on the instrument panel cluster,and at the same time a warning message to checkthe pressure in a specific tire displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and the DIC warningmessage CHECK TIRE PRESSURE comeon at each ignition cycle until the tires are inflatedto the correct inflation pressure.

409

For additional information and details about theDIC operation and displays see DIC Controls andDisplays (Base Level DIC) on page 186 or DICControls and Displays (Uplevel DIC with TripComputer) on page 190 and DIC Warnings andMessages on page 200.

During cooler weather conditions, the low tirepressure warning light and the DIC warningmessage may come on when the vehicle is firststarted and then turn off as you start to drive. Thiscould be an early indicator that the tire pressuresare getting low and need to be inflated to theproper pressure.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), shouldbe checked monthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard or tireinflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires ofa different size than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas been equipped witha tire pressuremonitoring system(TPMS) that illuminatesa low tire pressuretelltale when oneor more of your tires issignificantlyunder-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltaleilluminates, you should stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflatedtire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tirefailure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’shandling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, evenif under-inflation has not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

410

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approximatelyone minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as themalfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions mayoccur for a variety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that thereplacement or alternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to function properly.

A Tire and Loading Information label, attached toyour vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires and the correct inflationpressure for your vehicle’s tires when they are cold.

See Loading Your Vehicle on page 317, for anexample of the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location on your vehicle. Also seeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 408.

Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you abouta low tire pressure condition but it does notreplace normal tire maintenance. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 414 and Tires onpage 400.

Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if yourvehicle has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquidsealant can damage the tire pressure monitorsensors.

The TPMS will not function properly if one or moreof the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable.If the system detects a missing or inoperablesensor, an error message SERVICE TIREMONITOR SYSTEM appears on the DIC display.If you have replaced a tire/wheel assemblywithout transferring the TPMS sensors, the errormessage displays. Once you re-install theTPMS sensors, the error message should go off.See your dealer for service if all TPMS sensorsare installed and the error message comes on andstays on.

411

TPMS Sensor Identification CodesEach TPMS sensor has a unique identificationcode. Any time you replace one or more ofthe TPMS sensors or rotate the vehicle’s tires,the identification codes need to be matched tothe new tire/wheel position. The sensors arematched, to the tire/wheel positions, in thefollowing order: driver side front tire, passengerside front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driverside rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool.See your dealer for service.

The TPMS sensors may also be matched to eachtire/wheel position by increasing or decreasingthe tire’s air pressure. When increasing the tire’spressure, do not exceed the maximum inflationpressure indicated on the tire’s sidewall.

You have two minutes to match each tire andwheel position. If it takes longer than two minutesto match any tire and wheel position, thematching process stops and you need tostart over.

The TPMS matching process is outlined below:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with theengine off.

3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter’s Lock and Unlock buttons atthe same time for approximately five seconds.The horn sounds twice to signal the receiveris in relearn mode and the TPMS sensormatching process can begin.

4. Start with the driver’s side front tire.

5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valvestem. Activate the TPMS sensor byincreasing or decreasing the tire’s airpressure for ten seconds, or until a hornchirp sounds. The horn chirp, whichmay take up to 30 seconds to sound,confirms that the sensor identification codehas been matched to the tire/wheelposition. To decrease the tire’s air-pressureuse the pointed end of the valve cap,a pencil-style air pressure gage, or a key.

412

6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, andrepeat the procedure in Step 5.

9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for thedriver side rear tire, the horn chirps two moretimes to signal the tire learning processhas ended. Turn the ignition switch to OFF.

10. Set all four tires to the recommended airpressure level as indicated on the tire andloading information label.

11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.

The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor.If you replace one of the road tires with the spare,the SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEMmessage will be displayed on the DIC. Thismessage should go off once you re-install the roadtire containing the TPMS sensor.

Federal Communications Commission(FCC) and Industry and ScienceCanadaThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withPart 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)operates on a radio frequency and complies withRSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:




413

Tire Inspection and RotationTire rotation is not recommended if your vehicle isa GXP model equipped with P255/45R18 sizetires on the front wheels and P225/50R18 size tireson the rear wheels. Different tire sizes front torear should not be rotated.

Tire rotation is recommended if the originalequipment tires installed on your vehicle areof the same size and type on all four tire/wheelpositions. Original equipment tires of thesame size and type should be rotated every5,000 to 8,000 miles (8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourvehicle’s tires as soon as possible and check thewheel alignment. Also check for damaged tiresor wheels. See When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 415 and Wheel Replacement on page 419for more information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve moreuniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 473 for scheduled rotationintervals.

The correct rotation pattern shown here is only fornon-GXP tires.Do not include the compact spare tire, if equipped,in your vehicle’s tire rotation.After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tireand Loading Information label, and reset the TirePressure Monitor System. See Tire PressureMonitor System on page 409 for additionalinformation.

Rotation Pattern for Non-GXP Tires Only

414

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 466.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 435.

When It Is Time for New TiresOne way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

415

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tiresinstalled on your vehicle, when it was new, weredesigned to meet General Motors TirePerformance Criteria Specification (TPC spec)system rating. If you need replacement tires, GMstrongly recommends that you get tires withthe same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehiclewill continue to have tires that are designed togive the same performance and vehicle safety,during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers overa dozen critical specifications that impact theoverall performance of your vehicle, includingbrake system performance, ride and handling,traction control, and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM’s TPC Spec number is moldedonto the tire’s sidewall by the tire manufacturer.If the tires have an all-season tread design,the TPC spec number will be followed by an MSfor mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labelingon page 401 for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes (other than those originallyinstalled on your vehicle), brands, ortypes (radial and bias-belted tires), thevehicle may not handle properly, and youcould have a crash. Using tires ofdifferent sizes (other than those originallyinstalled on your vehicle) may also causedamage to your vehicle. Be sure to usethe correct size, brand, and type tires onall wheels. If your vehicle has a compactspare tire, it is all right to drive yourvehicle with the compact sparetemporarily. It was developed for use onyour vehicle. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 447.

416

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size, load range, speedrating, and construction type (radial andbias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed onthe Tire and Loading Information label. Thislabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 317,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

417

See Buying New Tires on page 416 andAccessories and Modifications on page 336 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conform

to federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measured undercontrolled conditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked Cmay have poor traction performance.

418

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

419

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset andbe mounted the same way as the one itreplaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way, youwill be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 435 for moreinformation.

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

420

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has P225/55R17, P255/45R18or P225/50R18 size tires, do not use tirechains, there is not enough clearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension or othervehicle parts. The area damaged by the tirechains could cause you to lose control ofyour vehicle and you or others may beinjured in a crash.

Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturer recommendsit for use on your vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions. Followthat manufacturer’s instructions.



To help avoid damage to your vehicle,drive slowly, readjust or remove thedevice if it is contacting your vehicle, anddo not spin your wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the front tires.

Notice: If your vehicle does not haveP225/55R17, P255/45R18 or P225/50R18 sizetires, use tire chains only where legal and onlywhen you must. Use only SAE Class S-typechains that are the proper size for yourtires. Install them on the front tires and tightenthem as tightly as possible with the endssecurely fastened. Drive slowly and follow thechain manufacturer’s instructions. If youcan hear the chains contacting your vehicle,stop and retighten them. If the contactcontinues, slow down until it stops. Drivingtoo fast or spinning the wheels with chains onwill damage your vehicle.

421

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your tiresproperly. See Tires on page 400. If air goes out ofa tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.But if you should ever have a blowout, here are afew tips about what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag thatpulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steeringwheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position,and then gently brake to a stop well out of thetraffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou’d use in a skid. In any rear blowout, removeyour foot from the accelerator pedal. Get thevehicle under control by steering the way you wantthe vehicle to go. It may be very bumpy andnoisy, but you can still steer. Gently brake to astop, well off the road if possible.

If a tire goes flat, and your vehicle has a sparetire, see Changing a Flat Tire on page 435.This information shows you how to use yourvehicle’s tire changing equipment and howto change a flat tire safely.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

422

If a Tire Goes Flat (GXP)GXP models have no spare tire, no tire changingequipment, and no place for storing a spare orflat tire. If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowly to a levelplace and stopping. Then do this:

1. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 134.

2. Park your vehicle. Set the parking brake firmlyand put the shift lever in PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) on page 116 foradditional information.

3. Turn off the engine.

4. Inspect the flat tire.

If the tire has been separated from the wheel orhas damaged sidewalls or large tears thatallow rapid air loss, call a tire repair facility. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 498.

If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by a nailor other similar road hazard, the tire inflator kit maybe used to temporarily repair the damaged tire.

The kit uses a liquid tire sealant to seal smallpunctures in the tread area of the tire. The flat tire isthen inflated to at least 30 psi (207 kPa) and drivento evenly distribute the tire sealant. The tirepressure is checked after driving for a maximum offive miles (8.0 km) to see if the slow leak has beenstopped. If the tire pressure is 19 psi (131 kPa) ormore, inflate the tire up to the standard operatingpressure as shown on the tire and loadinginformation label. This label is attached to thevehicle’s center-pillar below the driver’s door latch.See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 408.

Notice: If the tire pressure has dropped below19 psi (131 kPa), the vehicle should not bedriven. Damage to the tire may be severe andthe sealant will not be effective. ContactRoadside Assistance, see Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 498.

You should have the damaged tire repaired assoon as possible. The tire sealant is a temporaryrepair only. If the tire has been filled with tiresealant, take the tire to a GM dealer for inspectionand repair. See Tire Inflator Kit (GXP) onpage 424 for additional information.

423

Tire Inflator Kit (GXP)Your vehicle may have a tire inflator kit. The kituses a liquid tire sealant and air at the same time toseal small punctures in the tread area of the tire. Besure to read and follow all the tire inflator kitinstructions.

The kit includes the following:

A. Air CompressorB. Tire Sealant CanisterC. Air Compressor

Accessory PlugD. On/Off Switch

E. Air Pressure GageF. Air Compressor

Inflator HoseG. Sealant

Filling Hose

424

If the flat tire is due to a slow leak caused by anail or other similar road hazard, the tire inflatorkit may be used to temporarily repair thedamaged tire.

After temporarily repairing a tire using the tireinflator kit, it is recommended to take your vehicleto an authorized GM dealer within 100 miles(161 kilometers) of driving to have the tireinspected and repaired. If the sealant isn’tremoved from the tire within a 100 miles(161 kilometers) of driving, it is more likelythat the tire and tire pressure monitoring sensormay get damaged and have to be replaced.

Accessing the Tire Inflator KitTo access the tire inflator kit, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 96for more information.

2. Locate the tire inflator kit by lifting up thecarpet.

3. Remove the inflatorkit cover by turningthe center nutcounterclockwise.

425

4. Remove the inflator kit by pulling it straightout of the foam container.

Tire SealantThe kit contains a liquid sealant that when injectedinto a flat tire, may temporarily repair nail holesor cuts in the tread area of the tire. The tire sealantcannot repair tire damage caused while drivingon a flat tire or a tire that has had a “blow out” ora tire that has punctures in the sidewall areas.The tire sealant solution is to be used for a singletire and can only be used once.

Check the tire sealant expiration date on thesealant canister. The sealant may not beas effective beyond the expiration date. If needed,see your GM dealer for a replacement canister.

After temporarily repairing a tire using the tiresealant, take your vehicle to an authorizedGM dealer to have the tire inspected and repaired.

426

Using the Tire Inflator KitTo use the tire inflator kit, do the following:

1. Place the inflator kit on the ground and unwrapthe sealant filling hose from the compressor.

2. Remove the air compressor accessory plugfrom the unit. To do this, pull the top portionof the wrapped cord out first, then the bottom,then unsnap the plug. Do not insert theplug into an accessory outlet yet.

3. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tireby turning it counterclockwise.If an object, such as a nail, has penetrated thetire, do not remove it.

4. Attach the sealant filling hose (A) onto the tirevalve stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.Make sure the inflator kit on/off switch (B) is inthe O (off) position.

5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C)into an accessory power outlet in the vehicle.See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 156for more information.

427

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine in a closed-in place orwith the climate control system off cancause deadly carbon monoxide (CO). SeeEngine Exhaust on page 119.

6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine onpage 107 for more information. The vehiclemust be running while using the aircompressor.

{CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can make itexplode, and you or others could beinjured. Be sure to read the inflatorinstructions, and inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do not exceed36 psi (248 kPa).

7. Move the inflator kit switch to the I (on)position.The inflator kit will force sealant and air intothe tire. Sealant may leak from the puncturehole until the vehicle is driven and the holehas sealed.

8. Make sure there is a proper connectionbetween the tire valve stem and thesealant filling hose by looking at the airpressure gage. If there is not a pressurereading while the compressor is running, theconnection between the inflator kit andthe tire is bad.Check the attachment between the sealantfilling hose and the tire valve stem.

428

9. Inflate the tire up to the recommendedinflation pressure, found on the Tire andLoading Information label located onthe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar) below thevehicle’s door latch, using the air pressuregage on the top of the unit as a guide.The pressure gage reading is slightly highwhile the compressor is on. Turn thecompressor off to get an accurate pressurereading.

Notice: If the recommended pressure cannotbe reached after 15 minutes, the vehicleshould not be driven farther. Damage to thetire is severe and the sealant will not beeffective. Remove the air compressor plugfrom the accessory power outlet and unscrewthe inflating hose from the tire valve. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 498.

10. Move the inflator kit switch to the O (off)position once the correct tire pressure isobtained.

11. Turn off the engine.

12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plugfrom the accessory power outlet in thevehicle.

13. Disconnect the sealant filling hose from thetire valve stem, by turning it counterclockwise,and replace the tire valve stem cap.Be careful when handling the tire inflatorcomponents as they may be hot after usage.

14. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the aircompressor channel to stow it in its originallocation.

15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug backin the air compressor. To do this, wrap the aircompressor accessory plug, snap in theplug, and then push in the bottom and thenthe top of the wrapped air compressoraccessory plug.

429

16. If the flat tire wasable to inflate to therecommendedinflation pressure,remove themaximum speedlabel from thesealant canister.

Place it in a highly visible location such asthe inside of the upper left corner of thewindshield or to the face of the radio/clock.The maximum speed label reminds youto drive cautiously and not to exceed55 mph (90 km/h) until you have thedamaged tire inspected and repaired.

{CAUTION:

Storing the tire inflator kit or otherequipment in the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could cause injury. In asudden stop or collision, loose equipmentcould strike someone. Store the tireinflator kit in the proper place.

17. Return the equipment to the proper storagelocation in the trunk of your vehicle.

430

18. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km)to distribute the sealant evenly in the tire.Stop at a safe location and check thetire pressure. Refer to Steps 1 through 8under “Using the Air Compressor withoutSealant” next in this section. If the tirepressure has fallen more than 10 psi (68 kPa)below the recommended inflation pressure,stop driving the vehicle. The tire is toodamaged for the sealant to work. SeeRoadside Assistance Program on page 498.If the tire pressure has not dropped more than10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommendedinflation pressure, you can inflate the tire backup to the recommended inflation pressure.

19. Dispose of the sealant canister at a local GMdealer or in accordance with your local statecodes and practices.After using the sealant canister, replace it witha new canister from a GM dealer.

20. After temporarily repairing a tire with theemergency flat tire repair kit, take yourvehicle to an authorized GM dealer to havethe tire inspected and repaired.

Using the Air Compressor withoutSealantTo use the air compressor by itself to inflate a tire,do the following:

1. Remove the air compressor accessory plugfrom the air compressor.

2. Unlock the air compressor hose from thesealant canister by pulling up on the lever.

3. Pull the air compressor inflator hose from thesealant canister.

431

4. Push the air compressor inflator hose onto thetire valve stem and push the lever down tosecure in place.

5. Plug the air compressor accessory plug intoan accessory power outlet in the vehicle. SeeAccessory Power Outlet(s) on page 156 formore information.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine in a closed-in place orwith the climate control system off cancause deadly carbon monoxide (CO). SeeEngine Exhaust on page 119.

6. Start the vehicle. See Starting the Engine onpage 107 for more information. The vehiclemust be running while using the aircompressor.

{CAUTION:

Inflating something too much can make itexplode, and you or others could beinjured. Be sure to read the inflatorinstructions, and inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do not exceed36 psi (248 kPa).

7. Move the inflator kit switch to the I (on)position.

8. Make sure there is a proper connectionbetween the tire valve stem and the aircompressor hose by looking at the airpressure gage. If there is not a pressurereading while the compressor is running, theconnection between the inflator kit andthe tire is bad.Check the attachment between the aircompressor hose and the tire valve stem.

432

9. Inflate the tire up to the recommendedinflation pressure using the air pressure gageon the top of the unit as a guide.

10. Turn off the air compressor by moving theswitch to the O (off) position.

{CAUTION:

Storing the tire inflator kit or otherequipment in the passenger compartmentof the vehicle could cause injury. In asudden stop or collision, loose equipmentcould strike someone. Store the tireinflator kit in the proper place.

11. Disconnect the compressor inflator hose andwrap the hose in the bottom of the inflator kit.

12. Place the equipment in the original location inthe trunk of your vehicle.

Removal and Installation of the SealantCanisterTo remove the sealant canister, do the following:

1. Unlock the air compressor inflator hose fromthe sealant canister by pulling the lever up.

2. Disconnect the air compressor inflator hosefrom the sealant canister.

3. Unwrap the sealant filling hose from thecompressor.

433

4. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator fillinghose is aligned with the slot in thecompressor.

5. Lift the sealant canister from the aircompressor and replace with a new sealantcanister. See your GM dealer for moreinformation.

To install a new sealant canister, do the following:

1. Align the sealant filling hose with the slot inthe air compressor.

2. Push the sealant canister down and turn itclockwise.

3. Wrap the sealant filling hose around the aircompressor channel to stow it in its originallocation.

4. Push the air compressor inflator hose ontothe sealant canister inlet and push thelever down.

434

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour vehicle’s hazard warning flashers. SeeHazard Warning Flashers on page 134 for moreinformation.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).



3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

435

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment needed to change a tire islocated in the trunk.

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 96 formore information.

2. Remove the convenience net, if equipped, byremoving the net hook attachments.

3. Lift up the carpet.4. Turn the center nut

on the compactspare tire covercounterclockwise toremove it.

5. Remove the cover.

6. Remove the compact spare tire. See CompactSpare Tire on page 447 for more information.

436

7. Turn the nut holding the jack counterclockwiseand remove it. Then remove the jack andwrench.

8. The tools you will be using include thejack (A), extension and protector/guide (B) andthe wheel wrench (C).

437

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare TireYour vehicle may have aluminum wheels. If so,you will see exposed stainless steel wheelnuts. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all thewheel nuts. Do not remove them yet.

Or, your vehicle may have steel wheel covers.

To remove the steel wheel covers and wheel nutcaps, loosen the plastic nut caps with the wheelwrench in a counterclockwise direction. If needed,you can finish loosening them with your fingers. Theplastic nut caps will not come off.

Use the flat end of the wheel wrench and pryalong the edge of the cover until it comes off. Theedge of the wheel cover could be sharp, so donot try to remove it with your bare hands. Do notdrop the cover or lay it face down, as it couldbecome scratched or damaged.

438

Once you have removed the wheel cover, use thefollowing procedure to remove the flat tire andinstall the spare tire.

1. Set the park brake firmly. Before precedingit is recommended that you perform a safetycheck. See Changing a Flat Tire onpage 435 for more information.

2. Turn the wheelwrench once oneach wheel nut toloosen them. Do notremove them yet.

3. Find the jacking location located on theunderside of the rocker trim using the diagram.For jacking at the vehicle’s front location,put the jack lift head (C) about 6 inches(15 cm) from the rear edge of the front wheelopening (B). Line up the jack with thearrow (A) as shown.

439

For jacking at the vehicle’s rear location, put thejack lift head (B) about 9 inches (23 cm) fromthe front edge of the rear wheel opening (C).Line up the jack with the arrow (A) as shown.

4. Put the compact spare tire near you.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

440

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire. 5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle

clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground for the compact spare tire to attachto the vehicle.

441

6. Remove all wheel nuts and take off theflat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time. Thewheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

7. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces and sparewheel.

8. Install the compact spare tire.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

442

9. Reinstall the wheelnuts with therounded end of thenuts toward thewheel. Tighten eachnut by hand untilthe wheel isheld againstthe hub.

10. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

443

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 466for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 466 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

11. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourcompact spare. If you try to put a wheel coveron the compact spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.

Do not try to put the wheel cover on the compactspare tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel coverin the trunk until the flat tire is repaired or replaced.

444

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

After the compact spare tire is put on the vehicle,store the flat tire in the trunk. Use the followingprocedure to secure it in the trunk. When storing afull-size tire, use the extension and protector/guide,located in the foam holder, to help avoid wheelsurface damage.

To store a full-size tire, do the following:

1. Install the tools in their original location in thetrunk area and secure.

2. Place the tire in the trunk with the valve stemfacing down, and the protector/guide placedthrough a wheel bolt hole.

3. Remove the protector and attach the retainersecurely.

4. Place the protector/guide back in the foamholder when putting the compact spare backin the trunk. Store the cover as far forwardas possible.

The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-sizetire as soon as possible. See Compact Spare Tireon page 447 for more information. Use thefollowing as a guide for storing the compact sparetire and tools.

445

A. RetainerB. CoverC. Compact Spare TireD. NutE. JackF. Wheel WrenchG. Extension and

Protective GuideH. Foam HolderI. Bolt Screw

A. RetainerB. Spare TireC. ProtectorD. Bolt ExtensionE. NutF. JackG. Wheel WrenchH. Foam HolderI. Bolt Screw

Compact Spare Tire Full-Sized Spare Tire

446

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly. Itshould be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,you should stop as soon as possible and makesure the spare tire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to perform well at speedsup to 65 mph (105 km/h) for distances up to3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can finish your tripand have the full-size tire repaired or replacedwhere you want. You must calibrate the tireinflation monitor system, if your vehicle has thisfeature, after installing or removing the compactspare. See Tire Pressure Monitor System onpage 409. The system may not work correctlywhen the compact spare is installed on the vehicle.Of course, it’s best to replace the spare with afull-size tire as soon as you can. The spare will lastlonger and be in good shape in case you needit again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep the spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

447

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may result fromusing cleaners on surfaces for which they were notintended. Use glass cleaner only on glass.

Remove any accidental over-spray from othersurfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, applycleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the integrated radio antenna and therear window defogger. When cleaning theglass on your vehicle, use only a soft cloth andglass cleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

448

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/Carpet

Cleaning Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust andloose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, andpainted surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabricand carpet. They will clean normal spots andstains very well.

If the vehicle has the Ultra Lux® suede fabric,follow the listed procedures except do not use anysolvents or dry cleaning products.

Here are some cleaning tips:

• Always read the instructions on the cleanerlabel.

• Clean up stains as soon as you can, beforethey set.

• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.

• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to aclean area often. A soft brush may be used ifstains are stubborn.

• To avoid forming a ring on fabric after spotcleaning, clean the entire area immediatelyor it will set.

449

Most stains can be removed with club soda water.To clean, use the following instructions:

1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft white cloth.For solids: remove as much as possible andthen vacuum or brush.

2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft whitecloth. Do not over-saturate; the cloth shouldnot drip water.

3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabrictoo wet.

4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain toavoid a ring effect.

5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of thecloth each time it becomes soiled.

6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleanedarea with another dry clean, soft white cloth.

Using Cleaner on Fabric1. First, try the cleaner in an inconspicuous area

to make sure the cleaner does not affect thecolor of the fabric.

2. For liquids: blot the stain with a clean, softwhite cloth.For solids: remove as much as possible andthen vacuum or brush.

3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto aclean, soft white cloth. Do not apply spraydirectly to the fabric.

4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain toavoid a ring effect.

5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of thecloth each time it becomes soiled.

6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleanedarea with another dry clean, soft white cloth.

7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow upwith the club soda water instructions givenearlier in this section.

Special Fabric Cleaning ProblemsStains caused by such things as catsup, coffee,tea, milk, fruit, fruit juice, jelly, cheese, chocolate,vomit, urine, and blood can be removed usingthe club soda water instructions given earlier in thissection. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit orurine, treat the area with a water and baking sodasolution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water. Let dry.

450

Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleanedwith an approved GM cleaner and a clean,white cloth.

1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.

2. Clean with cool water and allow to drycompletely.

3. If a stain remains, follow the cleanerinstructions described earlier.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because

they can alter the appearance by increasing thegloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

Ultra Lux Suede

Cleaning Ultra Lux SuedeUse a mild solution of lukewarm water and aneutral dish soap on a soft cloth or sponge. Forthe following stains, follow these instructions:

Coffee, Tea, and Milk: Blot with a clean,soft, white cloth. Then clean with mild soapywater and a clean white cloth.

Cosmetics: Clean with mild soapy water and aclean white cloth.

Jelly, Syrup, and Fruit: Remove most of thesolids, then clean with warm tap water and a cleanwhite cloth.

Oil and Grease: Sprinkle baking soda on thespot, brush, then wipe with a clean white cloth.

451

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 483.

452

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 457. Do notuse cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and not allowedto dry on the surface, or they could stain. Drythe finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratches andwater spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 453.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 457.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish. The clearcoat gives more depth and glossto the colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

453

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap, or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a glasscleaning liquid or powder and water solution.The windshield is clean if beads do not form whenit is rinsed with water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

454

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Do not take the vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

455

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials from theunderbody with plain water. Clean any areas wheremud and debris can collect. Dirt packed in closeareas of the frame should be loosened before beingflushed. Your dealer or an underbody car washingsystem can do this for you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

456

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description UsagePolishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step. Nowiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

457

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver’s side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code will help you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelYou will find this label in the trunk. It is very helpfulif you ever need to order parts. On this label,you will find the following:

• VIN

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

458

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 78.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp circuit is protected by individualfuses in the underhood fuse block. An electricaloverload will cause the fuse to blow. If thishappens, have the headlamp system checkedright away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers in the fuse panel protect thepower windows and other power accessories.When the current load is too heavy, the circuitbreaker opens and closes, protecting the circuituntil the problem is fixed.

459

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and fusible thermal links in thewiring itself. This greatly reduces the chanceof fires caused by electrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. Ifthe band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure to replace a bad fuse with a new one ofthe identical size and rating. Spare fuses anda fuse puller are located in the underhoodfuse block. See Underhood Fuse Block later inthis section.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

Some fuses are in afuse block located onthe end of theinstrument panel on thepassenger side.

To get to the fuse block lift up on the side panel.A fuse usage chart is on the inside of thispanel.

460

Fuse UsageRAP Retained Accessory Power

SUN ROOF SunroofCRUISE SW Cruise Switch

PK LP Parking LampsRR DEFOG Rear Window Defogger

DR LK/TRUNK Door Lock/TrunkONSTAR/ALDL Onstar®/Diagnostic Link

Fuse UsageCANISTER Fuel Tank Solenoid CanisterPK LAMPS Parking LampsRADIO/AMP Radio Amplifier

RFA/MOD Remote Function Activator(Remote Keyless Entry)

DISPLAYSInstrument Panel Displays/Head-UpDisplay (HUD), Driver InformationCenter (DIC)

INT LIGHT Interior LampsHVAC Climate Controls

CHMSL/BKUP Center High Mounted StopLamp/Back-Up Lamps

PWR WDO Power WindowsSPRINGCOIL 2 Steering Wheel Control Switches

PWR SEAT Power Seat

TURN/HAZ Turn Signals/HazardWarning Lamps

PWR MIRS Power MirrorsHTD SEAT Heated Seat

To reinstall the end panel, position the lowersection with the edge of the instrument panel,and press the sides of the panel until it snapsinto place.

461

Underhood Fuse Block

The underhood fuseblock is located on thepassenger’s side ofthe vehicle in the enginecompartment.

To remove the fuse block cover, press in on thetab at the bottom of the cover and pull up.

Fuses Usage1 Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp

2 Passenger’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp

3 Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp

4 Passenger’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

3800 V6 Engine

462

Fuses Usage5 Windshield Wipers/Washer6 Washer/Remote Vehicle Current7 Fog Lamps (Option)9 Airbag

10 Accessory Power11 Horn12 Emission13 Air Conditioning Clutch14 Oxygen Sensor15 Powertrain Control Module

16 Powertrain ControlModule/Electronic Throttle Control

17 Electronic Throttle Control18 Display19 Anti-lock Brake Solenoid20 Fuel Injection21 Transaxle Solenoid22 Fuel Pump23 Anti-lock Brakes

Fuses Usage24 Electronic Ignition26 Battery Main 127 Battery Main 228 Battery Main 329 Fan 130 Battery Main 431 Anti-lock Brake Motor32 Fan 233 Starter56 Air Pump

Relays Usage34 High-Beam Headlamps

35 Low-Beam Headlamps, HeadlampDriver Module

36 Fog Lamps (Option)37 Ignition 138 Air Conditioner Compressor39 Horn40 Powertrain

463

Relays Usage41 Fuel Pump42 Fan 143 Fan 344 Windshield Wiper/High45 Windshield Wiper46 Fan 248 Crank49 Spare Fuse50 Spare Fuse51 Spare Fuse52 Blank53 Blank54 Blank55 Fuse Puller

§ Air Conditioning ClutchFuses UsageHVAC Climate Control System

FUEL/PUMP Fuel PumpAIRBAG/DISPLAY Airbag, Display

COMPASS CompassABS Anti-lock Brake System

5.3L V8 Engine

464

Fuses Usage

ETC/ECM Electronic Throttle Control, EngineControl Module

A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning CompressorINJ 1 Injectors 1

ECM/TCM Engine Control Module, TransaxleControl Module

TRANS TransaxleEMISSIONS 1 Emissions 1

ABS SOL Anti-lock Brake SolenoidECM IGN Engine Control Module, Ignition

INJ 2 Injectors 2EMISSIONS 2 Emissions 2

WPR Windshield WipersAUX PWR Auxiliary Power

WSW/RVC Windshield Washer, RegulatedVoltage Control

LT LO BEAM Driver’s Side Low-Beam Headlamp

RT LO BEAM Passenger’s Side Low-BeamHeadlamp

FOG LAMPS Fog LampsLT HI BEAM Driver’s Side High-Beam Headlamp

HORN Horn

RT HI BEAM Passenger’s Side High-BeamHeadlamp

Fuses UsageSPARE SpareSPARE SpareSPARE SpareSPARE SpareSPARE Spare

Relays UsageBATT 4 Battery 4

FUEL/PUMP Fuel PumpBATT 1 Battery 1

A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning CompressorSTRTR Starter

PWR/TRN PowertrainSTRTR Starter

ABS MTR Anti-lock Brake System MotorBATT 3 Battery 3BATT 2 Battery 2FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2FAN 3 Cooling Fan 3FAN 2 Cooling Fan 2FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1FAN 1 Cooling Fan 1HDM Headlamp Driver Module

465

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 483 for more information.

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Automatic Transaxle (Drain and Refill) 7.4 qt 7.0 L

Cooling System Including Reservoir

3800 V6 Engine 11.2 qt 10.6 L

3800 V6 Supercharged Engine 11.2 qt 10.6 L

5.3L V8 Engine 13.3 qt 12.6 L

Engine Oil with Filter

3800 V6 Engine 4.5 qt 4.3 L

3800 V6 Supercharged Engine 4.5 qt 4.3 L

5.3L V8 Engine 6 qt 5.7 L

466

Capacities and Specifications (cont’d)

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Fuel Tank

3.8L Engine (with NU6 emissions) sold new in CA, ME, VT,NY, MA (see your dealer for bordering states) 17.0 gal 64.4 L

3.8L Engine (without NU6 emissions) sold new in all otherstates (see your dealer for more information) 17.5 gal 66.2 L

5.3L V8 Engine sold new in all states 17.5 gal 66.2 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 ft lb 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding fluid, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

3800 V6(3.8L L26) 2 Automatic .060 inches (1.52 mm)

3800 V6 Supercharged(3.8L L32) 4 Automatic .060 inches (1.52 mm)

5.3L V8 Engine C Automatic .040 inches (1.01 mm)

467

✍ NOTES

468

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 470Introduction ............................................... 470Maintenance Requirements ........................ 470Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 471Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 471Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 473Additional Required Services ..................... 476Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 477

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 479At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 479At Least Once a Month ............................. 480At Least Once a Year ............................... 480Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 483Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 484Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 485Maintenance Record .................................. 487

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

469

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary tokeep your vehicle in good working condition.Any damage caused by failure to followscheduled maintenance may not be covered bywarranty.

470

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we donot know exactly how you will drive it. You maydrive very short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it towork, to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may needmore frequent checks and replacements. So pleaseread the following and note how you drive. If youhave any questions on how to keep your vehicle ingood condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.

471

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 317.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 338.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 473 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 476 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 477 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job. Ifyou have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex. So,unless you are technically qualified and havethe necessary equipment, you should have yourGM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

472

If you want to purchase service information,see Service Publications Ordering Informationon page 511.

Owner Checks and Services on page 479 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehicle ingood condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 483 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 484.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyone elsedrives the vehicle. We recommend the use ofgenuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL SOON message comeson, it means that service is required for yourvehicle. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 200. Have your vehicle serviced as soon aspossible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It ispossible that, if you are driving under the bestconditions, the engine oil life system may notindicate that vehicle service is necessary for over ayear. However, your engine oil and filter must bechanged at least once a year and at this time thesystem must be reset. Your GM Goodwrench®

dealer has GM-trained service technicians who willperform this work using genuine GM parts and resetthe system.

473

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 353 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections arerequired. Required services are described in thefollowing for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your firstservice be Maintenance I, your second service beMaintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II may berequired more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if theCHANGE OIL SOON message comes on within10 months since the vehicle was purchasedor Maintenance II was performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on at allfor one year.

474

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 350. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 353. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (k). • •Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 355. See footnote (m). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 414 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Monthon page 480.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid asneeded. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •Check transaxle fluid level and add fluid as needed. •Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (g). •Inspect throttle system. See footnote (j). •

475

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damage orleaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 355. • • •

Supercharger service, if equipped.An Emission Control Service.See footnotes † and (l).

• • • • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (severe service). See footnote (h). • • •

Change automatic transaxle fluid andfilter (normal service). •

Replace spark plugs and inspect sparkplug wires. An Emission ControlService.

•

476

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Engine cooling system service (or everyfive years, whichever occurs first). AnEmission Control Service.See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt. AnEmission Control Service.See footnote (n).

•

Maintenance Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or theCalifornia Air Resources Board has determined thatthe failure to perform this maintenance item will notnullify the emission warranty or limit recall liabilityprior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life.We, however, urge that all recommendedmaintenance services be performed at the indicatedintervals and the maintenance be recorded.

(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors forsurface condition. Inspect other brake parts,including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect power steering linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc.

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace withgenuine GM parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

477

(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace wiper blades that appear wornor damaged or that streak or miss areas ofthe windshield.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Alsolook for any opened or broken airbag coverings,and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders. Lubricate allhinges and latches, including those for thebody doors, hood, secondary latch, pivots, springanchor, release pawl, rear compartment, glovebox door, console door, and any folding seathardware. More frequent lubrication maybe required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,the filter may require replacement more often.

(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter ifthe vehicle is mainly driven under one or more ofthese conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) orhigher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 360 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) Check throttle system for interference orbinding and for damaged or missing parts. Replaceparts as needed. Replace any components thathave high effort or excessive wear. Do notlubricate accelerator or cruise control cables.

478

(k) A fluid loss in any vehicle system couldindicate a problem. Have the system inspectedand repaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluidif needed.

(l) For supercharged engines only: Have yourdealer check the supercharger oil level andadd the proper supercharger oil as needed (orevery 36 months, whichever occurs first). SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 483.

(m) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(n) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to help ensurethe safety, dependability, and emission controlperformance of your vehicle. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer can assist you with thesechecks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 483.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oil ifnecessary. See Engine Oil on page 350 for furtherdetails.

Notice: It is important to check your oilregularly and keep it at the proper level. Failureto keep your engine oil at the proper levelcan cause damage to your engine not coveredby your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 360 for further details.

479

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect your vehicle’s tires and makesure they are inflated to the correct pressures.Do not forget to check the spare tire. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 408. Check tomake sure the spare tire is stored securely.See Changing a Flat Tire on page 435.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 414.

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 115.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

3. Try to start the engine in each gear. Thevehicle should start only in PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in anyother position, contact your GM Goodwrench®

dealer for service.

480

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 115.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if serviceis required.

481

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

482

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification may be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meetsGM Standard GM6094M anddisplays the American PetroleumInstitute Certified for GasolineEngines starburst symbol.GM Goodwrench® oil meets all therequirements for your vehicle. Todetermine the proper viscosity foryour vehicle’s engine, see EngineOil on page 350.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 360.

Hydraulic BrakeSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

Usage Fluid/LubricantAutomaticTransaxle

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Supercharger

Supercharger Oil(GM Part No. U.S. 12345982,in Canada 10953513). SeeSupercharger Oil on page 355.

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch,Pivots, SpringAnchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and DoorHinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

483

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour GM dealer.

Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts

Part GM Part Number ACDelco® PartNumber

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

3800 V6 Engine 15221217 —

5.3L V8 Engine 10350737 —

Engine Oil Filter

3800 V6 Engine 25010792 PF47

5.3L V8 Engine 89017524 PF48

Passenger Compartment Air Filter 15284938 CF132

Spark Plugs

3800 V6 Engine 12568387 41-101

5.3L V8 Engine 12571164 41-985

Windshield Wiper Blade Assembly22.0 in (55.0 cm)

Driver Side 15146562 —

Passenger Side 15146563 —

484

Engine Drive Belt Routing

3.8L V6 Supercharged Engine

3.8L V6 Engine

485

5.3L V8 Engine

486

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service,and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 470.Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 479 can be added on the followingrecord pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

487

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



488




489




490

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 492Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 492Online Owner Center ................................. 495Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users .......................... 496Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 496GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 497Roadside Assistance Program ................... 498Courtesy Transportation ............................. 501Vehicle Data Collection and

Event Data Recorders ............................ 504Collision Damage Repair ........................... 505

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 510Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ................................ 510Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 510Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 510Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 511

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

491

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the PontiacCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Pontiac, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

492

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, you should file with theBBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of theNew Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action, useof the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do notagree with the decision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any other venue for reliefavailable to you.

You can contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage and other factors. GeneralMotors reserves the right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue its participation inthis program.

493

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and freeof charge.

For further information concerning eligibility in theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you can call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

494

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

495

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Pontiac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user can communicate with Pontiac bydialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesPontiac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Pontiac, the letter shouldbe addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistancePontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.Pontiac.com1-800-762-2737 or1-800-833-7668(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE(762-3743)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

496

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma #2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

497

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Pontiac RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel may berestricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registration andpersonal ID before lock-out service is provided.Lock-out service is covered at no charge if youare unable to gain entry into your vehicle. Ifyour vehicle does not start, RoadsideAssistance will arrange to have your vehicletowed to the nearest authorized dealership.In the U.S., replacement keys made at thecustomer’s expense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

498

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of your spare tirein good condition is covered at no charge.The customer is responsible for the repair orreplacement of the tire if not covered by awarrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start is covered atno charge.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance can send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlighting yourchoice of either the most direct route or themost scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along with anyhelpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly aspossible, but it’s best to allow three weeksbefore your planned departure date.Trip routing requests will be limited tosix per calendar year.

499

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expenseyou may incur while waiting for your vehicle tobe repaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receiptsand a copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim fortrip interruption expense assistance.

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100upon submission of the original receipt toRoadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures are coveredunder Pontiac’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty, andthe duration of the Base Warranty Coverage forCanadian customers of the new Vehicle LimitedWarranty. However, any cost for parts and labor fornon-warranty repairs are the responsibility of thedriver.For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:• Your name, home address, and home

telephone number.• Telephone number of your location.• Location of the vehicle.• Model, year, color, and license plate number

of the vehicle.• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. Pontiac RoadsideAssistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743), texttelephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438,Canadian customers call 1-800-268-6800.

500

Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their solediscretion, the claims become excessive infrequency or type of occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Pontiac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

501

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment andadvising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts.

502

In addition, for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through a friend or relative,limited reimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claim amounts shouldreflect actual costs and be supported by originalreceipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

503

Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, hasa number of sophisticated computer systems thatmonitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control componentsto optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations. Someinformation may be stored during regular operationsto facilitate repair of detected malfunctions; otherinformation is stored only in a crash event bycomputer systems, such as those commonly calledEvent Data Recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theairbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) inyour vehicle may record information about thecondition of the vehicle and how it was operated,such as data related to engine speed, brakeapplication, throttle position, vehicle speed, safetybelt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle isequipped with StabiliTrak®, steering performance,

including yaw rate, steering wheel angle, and lateralacceleration, is also recorded. This information hasbeen used to improve vehicle crash performanceand may be used to improve crash performance offuture vehicles and driving safety. Unlike the datarecorders on many airplanes, these on-boardsystems do not record sounds, such asconversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

504

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle has OnStar®, please check theOnStar® subscription service agreement or manualfor information on its operations and datacollection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

505

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

506

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing companymay require you to have insurance that assuresrepairs with Genuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts or GenuineManufacturer replacement parts. Read your leasecarefully, as you may be charged at the end ofyour lease for poor quality repairs.

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to move it by apolice officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 498 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

507

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company and policynumber, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

508

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, orhave it towed there. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collision parts be originalequipment parts, either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycledparts will not be covered by your GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts.

Remember if your vehicle is leased you may beobligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurancecoverage does not pay the full cost.

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

509

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe that yourvehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-762-2737,or write:

Pontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

510

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unit repairservice procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your GeneralMotors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin fromHelm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

511

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The ownermanual will include the Maintenance Schedule forall models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

512

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 336Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 156Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 79Additives, Fuel ............................................ 340Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 459Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 355Air Conditioning .................................. 157, 162Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 173Readiness Light ....................................... 172

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 504

Airbag System ............................................... 64Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 79How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 72Passenger Sensing System ....................... 74Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 78What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 71What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 72When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 70Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 67

Antenna, Backglass ..................................... 280Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna

System .................................................... 281Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 289Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 177Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 454Care of Safety Belts ................................ 452Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 456Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 453Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 448Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 449Finish Care .............................................. 453Finish Damage ......................................... 456Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 452Leather .................................................... 451Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 455Tires ........................................................ 455Ultra Lux Suede ....................................... 451Underbody Maintenance ........................... 456Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 457Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 453Weatherstrips ........................................... 452Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 454

Ashtray(s) .................................................... 157Assist Handles ............................................ 127

513

Audio System(s) .......................................... 233Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 277Backglass Antenna ................................... 280Care of Your CD Player ........................... 279Care of Your CDs .................................... 279Chime Level Adjustment ........................... 281Radio with CD ................................ 235, 245Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 255Setting the Time ...................................... 234Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 277Understanding Radio Reception ............... 278XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 281

Automatic TransaxleFluid ........................................................ 357Operation ................................................. 110

BBackglass Antenna ...................................... 280Battery ........................................................ 381

Electric Power Management ..................... 150Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 146Run-Down Protection ............................... 151

Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 308

BrakeAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 289Emergencies ............................................ 291Parking .................................................... 115System Warning Light .............................. 176

Brakes ........................................................ 378Braking ....................................................... 288Braking in Emergencies ............................... 291Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 105Bulb Replacement ....................................... 391

Back-Up Lamps ....................................... 397Front Turn Signal, Parking and

Fog Lamps ........................................... 394Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 391Headlamp Aiming ..................................... 388License Plate Lamps ................................ 398Replacement Bulbs .................................. 398Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..... 395

Buying New Tires ........................................ 416

CCalibration ................................................... 198California Fuel ............................................. 340California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 337Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 466

514

Carbon Monoxide ............... 96, 119, 311, 324Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 452Your CD Player ........................................ 279Your CDs ................................................. 279

CD, MP3 ..................................................... 269Center Console Storage Area ...................... 127Chains, Tire ................................................. 421Check

Engine Light ............................................ 180Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 344Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 456Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 45Infants and Young Children ........................ 42Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 51Older Children ........................................... 39Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat

Position .................................................. 58Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ................................. 60Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 49

Chime Level Adjustment .............................. 281Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 157

CleaningAluminum Wheels .................................... 454Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 453Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 449Finish Care .............................................. 453Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 448Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 452Leather .................................................... 451Tires ........................................................ 455Ultra Lux Suede ....................................... 451Underbody Maintenance ........................... 456Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 453Weatherstrips ........................................... 452Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 454

Climate Control System ............................... 157Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 166Dual Automatic ......................................... 162Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 166

Collision Damage Repair ............................. 505Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 35Compact Spare Tire .................................... 447Compass ..................................................... 198Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 100Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 288Convenience Net ......................................... 127

515

CoolantEngine Temperature Gage ........................ 180Engine Temperature Warning Light ........... 179Heater, Engine ......................................... 108

Cooling System ........................................... 366Courtesy Lamps .......................................... 147Cruise Control ............................................. 140Cruise Control Light .................................... 185Cupholder(s) ................................................ 126Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 501Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users .......................................... 496Customer Assistance Offices .................... 496Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 492GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 497Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 510Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 510Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 510Roadside Assistance Program .................. 498Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 511

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 145Defensive Driving ........................................ 284Delayed Entry Lighting ................................ 148Delayed Exit Lighting ................................... 149Delayed Locking ............................................ 94DIC Compass .............................................. 198Disc, MP3 ................................................... 269Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 337Dome Lamp ................................................ 147Door

Delayed Locking ........................................ 94Locks ......................................................... 92Power Door Locks ..................................... 94Programmable Automatic Door Locks ......... 95Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 95

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 22

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 186DIC Controls and Displays .............. 186, 190DIC Vehicle Customization ....................... 226DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 200

516

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 302City .......................................................... 306Defensive ................................................. 284Drunken ................................................... 285Freeway ................................................... 307Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 309In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 303Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 316Winter ...................................................... 311

Dual Automatic Climate Control System ....... 162

EElectric Power Management ........................ 150Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 459Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 460Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 459Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 460Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 459Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 462Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 459

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 355Battery ..................................................... 381Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 180Coolant .................................................... 360Coolant Heater ......................................... 108Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 180Coolant Temperature Warning Light .......... 179Drive Belt Routing .................................... 485Engine Compartment Overview ................ 346Exhaust ................................................... 119Oil ........................................................... 350Oil Life System ........................................ 353Overheated Protection Operating Mode .... 366Overheating ............................................. 364Starting .................................................... 107Supercharger Oil ...................................... 355

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ................ 293Warning Light ........................................... 179

Entry Lighting .............................................. 148Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 504Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 38Exterior Lamps ............................................ 144Exterior Lighting Battery Saver .................... 146

517

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 355Finish Damage ............................................ 456Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 134Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 137Flat Tire ...................................................... 422Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 435Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 445Fluid

Automatic Transaxle ................................. 357Power Steering ........................................ 376Windshield Washer .................................. 377

Fog Lamp Light ........................................... 185Fog Lamps .................................................. 146Folding Rear Seat ......................................... 16Folding Seatback, Passenger ........................ 14Front Reading Lamps .................................. 149Front Seat Storage Net ............................... 127Fuel ............................................................ 338

Additives .................................................. 340California Fuel .......................................... 340Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 344Filling Your Tank ...................................... 342

Fuel (cont.)Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 341Gage ....................................................... 185Gasoline Octane ...................................... 338Gasoline Specifications ............................ 339

FusesFuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 460Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 460Underhood Fuse Block ............................. 462Windshield Wiper ..................................... 459

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 180Fuel ......................................................... 185Speedometer ........................................... 170Tachometer .............................................. 171

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 338Specifications ........................................... 339

Glove Box ................................................... 126GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 497

518

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 134Head Restraints ............................................ 13Headlamp

Aiming ..................................................... 388Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 459Headlamps

Bulb Replacement .................................... 391Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 145Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 137Front Turn Signal, Parking and

Fog Lamps ........................................... 394Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 391Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps .......... 391High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 137On Reminder ........................................... 145

Headlamps and Sidemarker Lamps ............. 391Head-Up Display (HUD) .............................. 151Heated Seats ................................................ 10Heater ......................................................... 157Heater ......................................................... 162Highbeam On Light ..................................... 185Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 309Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 309

HoodChecking Things Under ............................ 344Release ................................................... 345

Horn ............................................................ 134How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 22

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 105Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 42Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 408Inflator Kit, Tire ........................................... 424Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 132Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 147Cluster ..................................................... 169

Interior Lamps ............................................. 146

JJump Starting .............................................. 382

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 86Keys ............................................................. 84

519

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 401Lamps

Battery Run-Down Protection ................... 151Courtesy .................................................. 147Dome ....................................................... 147Electric Power Management ..................... 150Exterior .................................................... 144Exterior Lighting Battery Saver ................. 146Fog .......................................................... 146Front Reading .......................................... 149Interior ..................................................... 146Overhead Console Reading ..................... 149Rear Assist Handle Reading .................... 149

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 51

License Plate Lamps ................................... 398Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 172Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 177Brake System Warning ............................. 176Cruise Control .......................................... 185Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ....... 179Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light ....................................... 179Fog Lamp ................................................ 185

Light (cont.)Highbeam On .......................................... 185Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ............. 178Malfunction Indicator ................................ 180Oil Pressure ............................................. 184Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 173Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 172Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 171TCS Warning Light .................................. 178Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ... 178Up-Shift ................................................... 175

LightingDelayed Entry .......................................... 148Delayed Exit ............................................ 149Entry ........................................................ 148

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 317Lockout Protection ......................................... 96Locks

Delayed Locking ........................................ 94Door .......................................................... 92Lockout Protection ..................................... 96Power Door ............................................... 94Programmable Automatic Door Locks ......... 95Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 95

Loss of Control ........................................... 301Lumbar

Power Controls ............................................ 9

520

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 476At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 479At Least Once a Month ............................ 480At Least Once a Year .............................. 480Introduction .............................................. 470Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 477Maintenance Record ................................ 487Maintenance Requirements ...................... 470Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 484Owner Checks and Services .................... 479Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 483Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 473Using ....................................................... 471Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 471

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 180Manual Passenger Seat .................................. 8Message

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 200Mirrors

Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 121Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 122Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 121

MP3 ............................................................ 269MyGMLink.com ............................................ 495

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................. 105Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 484

OOdometer .................................................... 170Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 299Oil

Engine ..................................................... 350Pressure Light .......................................... 184Supercharger, Engine ............................... 355

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 353Older Children, Restraints ............................. 39Online Owner Center ................................... 495OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 122Other Warning Devices ................................ 134Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 166Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 156Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 122Power Mirrors .......................................... 121

Overhead Console Reading Lamps ............. 149Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ....................................... 366Owner Checks and Services ....................... 479Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

521

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 456Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 116Shifting Out of ......................................... 117

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 115Over Things That Burn ............................ 118

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 173Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 166Passenger Sensing System ........................... 74Passing ....................................................... 299PASS-Key® III ............................................. 102PASS-Key® III Operation ............................. 103Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 156Door Locks ................................................ 94Electrical System ..................................... 459Lumbar Controls .......................................... 9Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 106Seat ............................................................ 8Steering Fluid .......................................... 376Windows .................................................... 99

Pressure Cap .............................................. 364Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 38Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............ 95

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 21

RRadios ........................................................ 233

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 279Care of Your CDs .................................... 279Radio with CD ................................ 235, 245Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 255Setting the Time ...................................... 234Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 277Understanding Reception ......................... 278

Rear Assist Handle Reading Lamps ............ 149Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 95Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 35Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 32Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 121Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 10Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 483Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 322Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 86Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 87Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................ 438

522

Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 436Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 398Replacement, Windshield ............................. 399Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 510General Motors ........................................ 510United States Government ....................... 510

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 80Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 81Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 106Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 31Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 498Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 316Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 485Running the Engine While Parked ............... 120

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 172Pretensioners ............................................. 38Reminder Light ........................................ 171

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 452Driver Position ........................................... 22How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 22Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 21Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 35Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 32Right Front Passenger Position .................. 31Safety Belt Extender .................................. 38Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 31Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 17Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 30

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 473Seatback, Folding Passenger ........................ 14Seats

Head Restraints ......................................... 13Heated Seats ............................................. 10Manual Passenger ....................................... 8Passenger Folding Seatback ...................... 14Power Lumbar ............................................. 9Power Seat ................................................. 8Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 10Split Folding Rear Seat .............................. 16

523

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ..................................... 58Right Front Seat Position ........................... 60

Service ........................................................ 336Accessories and Modifications .................. 336Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your

Vehicle ................................................. 338California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 337Doing Your Own Work ............................. 337Engine Soon Light ................................... 180Publications Ordering Information ............. 511

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 78Setting the Time .......................................... 234Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 455Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 116Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 117Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 30Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 136Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 447Installing .................................................. 438Removing ................................................ 436Storing ..................................................... 445

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 466Speedometer ............................................... 170Split Folding Rear Seat ................................. 16StabiliTrak® Plus System ............................. 295

Starting Your Engine ................................... 107Steering ...................................................... 296Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 277Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 135Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 127Convenience Net ..................................... 127Cupholder(s) ............................................ 126Front Seat Storage Net ............................ 127Glove Box ................................................ 126Sunglasses Storage Compartment ............ 127

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 316Sun Visors .................................................. 100Sunroof ....................................................... 128

TTachometer ................................................. 171Taillamps

Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..................... 395TCS Warning Light ...................................... 178Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 277Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 100

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 100PASS-Key® III .......................................... 102PASS-Key® III Operation .......................... 103

524

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 135Tires ........................................................... 400

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 454Buying New Tires ..................................... 416Chains ..................................................... 421Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 435Cleaning .................................................. 455Compact Spare Tire ................................. 447Different Size ........................................... 417If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 422Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 408Inspection and Rotation ............................ 414Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 438Pressure Monitor System ......................... 409Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 438Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 436Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 445Tire Inflator Kit ......................................... 424Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 401Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 405Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 418Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 419Wheel Replacement ................................. 419When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 415

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 322Towing a Trailer ....................................... 324Your Vehicle ............................................. 322

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 292Control System Warning Light .................. 178Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ............. 293Enhanced Traction System (ETS) Warning

Light ..................................................... 179StabiliTrak® Plus System .......................... 295

TransaxleFluid, Automatic ....................................... 357

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 110Transmission

Up-Shift Light ........................................... 175Trunk ............................................................ 96Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 136Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 135

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 278Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 418Up-Shift Light .............................................. 175

525

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 288Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 317Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Customization, DIC ......................... 226Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data

Recorders ................................................ 504Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 458Service Parts Identification Label .............. 458

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 166Visors .......................................................... 100

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 168Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 200Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 134Other Warning Devices ............................ 134Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 419Different Size ........................................... 417Replacement ............................................ 419

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 49Windows ....................................................... 98

Power ........................................................ 99Windshield

Replacement ............................................ 399Washer Fluid ........................................... 377Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 399Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 454Wiper Fuses ............................................ 459Wiper Lever ............................................. 138

Winter Driving ............................................. 311

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 275XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 281

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 471

526

Documents

2007 Pontiac Grand Prix Owner Manual M - General Motors · 2020-04-09 · 2007 Pontiac Grand Prix Owner Manual M 1. Windshield Replacement ... Detroit, MI 48207 Litho in U.S.A